city of austin austin water project manual contract
TRANSCRIPT
The City of Austin is committed to compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act Reasonable modifications and equal access to communications will be provided upon request
CITY OF AUSTIN Austin Water
PROJECT MANUAL Contract Documents and Technical Specifications
VOLUME 2 of 5
South Austin Regional Wastewater Treatment Plant Electrical Substation No 1 Replacement Project
CIP PROJECT NUMBER 3333032 SOLICITATION NUMBER CLMC739
CITY OF AUSTIN Public Works Department
PO Box 1088 Austin Texas 78767
Documents Prepared By
8100 Cross Park Drive Austin Texas 78754
TBPE Firm Registration No F-2408
In Association With AECOM
CAS Consulting amp Services Inc HVJ Associates Inc
Jose I Guerra Inc Macias amp Associates LP MWM Design Group Inc
CONFORMED DOCUMENT
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CITY OF AUSTIN Austin Water
South Austin Regional Wastewater Treatment Plant
Electrical Substation No 1 Replacement Project
CIP PROJECT NUMBER 3333032 SOLICITATION NUMBER CLMC739
PROJECT MANUAL
Submitted by
8100 Cross Park Drive Austin Texas 78754
TBPE Firm Registration No F-2408
Specification Sections All specification sections with exception of those sections
listed on the following pages
Kegham A Harutunian Texas PE No 59181 Anne H Harutunian Texas PE No 115716
Shant Harutunian Texas PE No 87735 Vigain Harutunian Texas PE No 87736
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Bidding Requirements Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
Table of Contents
Document Number
Date Title
Rev Date 092719 Table of Contents Page 1 of 6
VOLUME 1 INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 092719 Table of Contents BIDDING REQUIREMENTS CONTRACT FORMS amp CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT PRE-BID INFORMATION 00020 081219 Invitation for Bids INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00100 081219 Instructions to Bidders INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS00220 033018 Geotechnical Data BID FORMS 00300L 081219 Bid Form-Lump Sum SUPPLEMENTS TO BID FORMS 00400 043019 Statement of Bidderrsquos Experience 00405 033018 Certificate of Non-Suspension Or Debarment 00410 091718 Statement of Bidderrsquos Safety Experience 00440 052019 Affidavit ndash Prohibited Activities AGREEMENT FORM 00500 081219 Agreement BONDS AND CERTIFICATES 00610 033018 Performance Bond 00620 033018 Payment Bond 00630 033018 Non-Discrimination and Non-Retaliation Certificate 00631 033018 Title VI Assurances Appendix A 00632 033018 Title VI Assurances Appendix E 00650 060818 Certificate of Insurance 00670 011119 Sales Tax Exemption Certificate 00680 033018 Non-Use of Asbestos Affidavit (Contractor Prior To Construction) 00681 033018 Non-Use of Asbestos Affidavit (Contractor After Construction) GENERAL CONDITIONS 00700 081219 General Conditions
Bidding Requirements Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
Table of Contents
Document Number
Date Title
Rev Date 092719 Table of Contents Page 2 of 6
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00810 081219 Supplemental General Conditions 00810A 091718 Federal Contract Provisions 00819 030717 Security Requirements 102419 Sp-1070 ndash Facility Security Procedure For Contractors 00820 033018 Modifications To Bidding Requirements and Contract Forms 00830 091718 Wage Rates and Payroll Reporting 00830HH 011119 Wage Rates Highway Heavy 00830BC 101419 Wage Rates Building Construction Trades 00840 092719 Construction Training Program Requirements 00900 011119 Addendum (SAMPLE) WRD-255 0117 Bidderrsquos Certifications ED-103 092616 Contractors Act of Assurance ED-104 100616 Contractors Act of Assurance Resolution SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 ndash GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 033018 Summary of Work 01020 033018 Allowances 01025 091718 Measurement and Payment 01050 101915 Grades Lines and Levels 01095 072103 Reference Standards and Definitions 01096 050611 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) 01200 080912 Project Meetings 01300 011119 Submittals 01310 102813 Progress Schedules 01352 062918 Sustainable Construction Requirements 01353 080912 Construction Equipment Emissions Reduction Plan 01380 080912 Construction Photography amp Videos 01500 081219 Temporary Facilities 01505 081219 Construction and Demolition Waste Management 01510 062918 Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan 01550 080912 Public Safety and Convenience 01600 090814 Material and Equipment 01730 090814 Operation and Maintenance Data 01900 031212 Prohibition of Asbestos Containing Material 01900A 060506 Statement of Non-Inclusion of Asbestos Containing Material (EA
Prior To Design) 01900B 060506 Statement of Non-Inclusion of Asbestos Containing Material (EA
After Design)
Bidding Requirements Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
Table of Contents
Document Number
Date Title
Rev Date 092719 Table of Contents Page 3 of 6
CITY STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SERIES 100 ndash EARTHWORK 102S 082007 Clearing and Grubbing 104S 092612 Removing Portland Cement Concrete 110S 111804 Street Excavation 111S 092612 Excavation 130S 092612 Borrow 132S 082007 Embankment SERIES 200 ndash SUBGRADE AND BASE CONSTRUCTION 201S 082007 Subgrade Preparation 202S 081800 Hydrated Lime and Lime Slurry 203S 092612 Lime Treatment for Materials in Place 210S 022410 Flexible Base 220S 022410 Sprinkling for Dust Control 230S 082007 Rolling (Flat Wheel) 232S 082007 Rolling (Pneumatic Tire) 236S 082007 Proof Rolling SERIES 300 ndash STREET SURFACE COURSES 360S 092612 Concrete Pavement SERIES 400 ndash CONCRETE STRUCTURES AND MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE 401S 092612 Structural Excavation and Backfill 402S 111307 Controlled Low Strength Material 403S 092612 Concrete for Structures 406S 092612 Reinforcing Steel 410S 092612 Concrete Structures 411S 111307 Surface Finishes For Concrete 420S 092612 Drilled Shaft Foundations 432S 010410 Portland Cement Concrete Sidewalks 433S 120908 P C Concrete Driveways SERIES 500 ndash PIPE AND APPURTENANCES 503S 021700 Frames Grates Rings and Covers 506 031511 Manholes 509S 092612 Excavation Safety Systems 510 120818 Pipe 591S 010416 Riprap for Slope Protection SERIES 600 ndash ENVIRONMENTAL ENHANCEMENT 601S 111416 Salvaging and Placing Topsoil 602S 061608 Sodding for Erosion Control 604S 010416 Seeding for Erosion Control 606S 062107 Fertilizer 608S 092612 Planting 609S 010416 Native Grassland Seeding and Planting for Erosion Control
Bidding Requirements Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
Table of Contents
Document Number
Date Title
Rev Date 092719 Table of Contents Page 4 of 6
610S 120718 Preservation of Trees and Other Vegetation 627S 092612 GrassLined Swale 639S 081810 Rock Berm 641S 062107 Stabilized Construction Entrance (SCE) 642S 090111 Silt Fence SERIES 700 ndash INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION 700S 092612 Mobilization 701S 092612 Fencing 702S 052002 Removal and Relocation of Existing Fences SERIES 800 ndash URBAN TRANSPORTATION 802S 092612 Project Signs 803S 111511 Barricades Signs and Traffic Handling SPECIAL PROVISIONS TO CITY STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SP 1 072613 Special Provision to the Measurement and Payment Section of the
City of Austin Standard Technical Specifications SP 102S 090616 Special Provision to Clearing and Grubbing SP 132S 090616 Special Provision to Embankment SP 401S 100819 Special Provision to Structural Excavation and Backfill SP 403S 041018 Special Provision to Concrete for Structures SP 406S 070518 Special Provision to Reinforcing Steel SP 410S 041018 Special Provision to Concrete Structures VOLUME 2 Special Specifications 092719 Table of Contents DIVISION 2 ndash SITE CONSTRUCTION 02831 041318 Chain Link Fence - Galvanized DIVISION 3 ndash CONCRETE 03392 091718 Penetrating Concrete Sealant DIVISION 4 ndash MASONRY 04090 091818 Masonry Accessories 04100 041018 Mortar and Masonry Grout 04211 091718 Brick Masonry 04220 011619 Concrete Masonry Units DIVISION 5 ndash METALS 05120 041018 Structural Steel 05210 041018 Steel Joists
Bidding Requirements Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
Table of Contents
Document Number
Date Title
Rev Date 092719 Table of Contents Page 5 of 6
05310 041018 Steel Deck 05500 041018 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 6 ndash WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 091718 Rough Carpentry DIVISION 7 ndash THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07130 080218 Under-Slab Vapor Barrier 07210 091718 Building Insulation 07220 040618 Roof Insulation 07411 091718 Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels 07620 091718 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07920 040618 Joint Sealants DIVISION 8 ndash DOORS AND WINDOWS 08111 040618 Aluminum Doors and Frames 08330 040618 Insulated Overhead Coiling Doors 08411 040618 Aluminum Framed Windows 08711 040618 Finish Hardware 08800 091718 Glazing DIVISION 9 ndash FINISHES 09900 040618 Painting DIVISION 10 ndash SPECIALTIES 10400 112017 Signage 10441 040618 Fire Extinguishers DIVISION 11 ndash EQUIPMENT NOT USED DIVISION 12 ndash FURNISHINGS NOT USED DIVISION 13 ndash SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13851 111319 Fire Alarm System DIVISION 14 ndash CONVEYING SYSTEMS NOT USED DIVISION 15 ndash MECHANICAL 15061 100719 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 15083 100719 Pipe Insulation 15183 100719 Refrigerant Piping 15184 100719 Copper Piping and Accessories 15500 100719 General HVAC Systems Materials and Methods 15780 100719 Scrubbers 15783 100719 Control-Room Air-Conditioning Units 15815 100719 Metal Ducts
Bidding Requirements Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
Table of Contents
Document Number
Date Title
Rev Date 092719 Table of Contents Page 6 of 6
15820 100719 Duct Accessories 15855 100719 Diffusers Registers and Grilles 15990 100719 Testing Adjusting and Balancing VOLUME 3 Special Specifications (Contrsquod) 092719 Table of Contents DIVISION 16 ndash ELECTRICAL 16044 100719 15KV Metal Clad Switchgear and 15KV Medium Voltage Overhead
Bus Ducts 16045 100719 Modifications to Existing 15KV Metal Clad Switchgear 16080 120519 Direct Current ldquoDCrdquo Power Storage Charging ldquoDCrdquo Distribution and
Inversion System 16150 100719 Raceways Fittings and Supports 16182 100719 Medium Voltage Cables 16200 100719 Wiring (600 Volts and Below) 16250 100719 Boxes and Cabinets 16300 100719 Wiring Devices 16350 100719 Lighting 16444 100719 Combination Motor Starters 16450 100719 600 Volt and Below Dry Type Transformers 16480 100719 Over 600 Volts Dry Type Transformers for Outdoor Service 16500 100719 Panelboards 16520 100719 Automatic Transfer Switch and Bypass Isolation Switches 16550 100719 Grounding 16600 100719 Disconnect Switches and Enclosed Circuit Breakers 16800 100719 Calibration Testing and Setting DIVISION 17 ndash INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 17100 100719 Process Instrumentation and Control System PICS 17200 100719 Instrument and Control Cabinets and Associated Equipment 17380 100719 Field Instrumentation and Sensing Devices 17600 100719 Distributed Control System VOL 4 101419 MBEWBE Procurement Program Package VOL 5 100819 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan END
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 02831 ndash Page 1 of 4 Chain Link Fence - Galvanized
AECOM TBPE Firm F-3580 041318
SECTION 02831
CHAIN LINK FENCE - GALVANIZED
PART 1 - GENERAL
101 DESCRIPTION
A Scope This Item governs for furnishing and installing chain link fence and related labor
materials and accessories complete in place
B Work Specified Elsewhere Other related work as called for on PLANS or specified
elsewhere in this or other TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
102 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Specification Section 01300 ldquoSubmittalsrdquo
A Product data for all materials used
B Shop drawings showing sizes fabrication anchorage finishes and other pertinent data
103 PRODUCT DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A Deliver fabric posts gates and accessories to job site with sufficient protection bracing
etc to ensure arrival in undamaged condition
B Store in original bundles on level supports and protect to prevent damage until erected
C The uniformity of the zinc coating shall be determined by visual inspection If in the
opinion of the ENGINEER visual examination is not conclusive he may use the Preece
Test as described in ASTM A239 When so tested all items shall withstand a minimum
of 6 one-minute dips except for those items designated in ASTM A153 as Class B-2
B-3 C and D which shall withstand a minimum of 4 one-minute dips
D Careful visual inspection shall be made to determine the quality of the zinc coating
Excessive roughness blisters salammoniac spots bruises and flaking if present to any
considerable extent shall provide a basis for rejection Where practicable all inspection
and tests shall be made at the place of manufacturer prior to shipment and shall be so
conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the progress of the work
E Damaged spelter coating shall be repaired by thoroughly wire brushing the damaged area
and removing all loose cracked or weld-burner spelter coating The cleaned area shall be
painted with 2 coats of zinc oxide-zinc dust paint conforming to the requirements of
Federal Specification TT-P-641B The paint shall be furnished at his expense
104 - 111 (NOT USED)
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 02831 ndash Page 2 of 4 Chain Link Fence - Galvanized
AECOM TBPE Firm F-3580 041318
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
201 MATERIALS
A Fabric to conform to ASTM A392 6 feet high No 9 WampM gage wire Unless otherwise
shown on PLANS or in Special Provision to this Item use Class 2 zinc coating Top and
bottom selvages to be twisted and barbed
B Barbed wire when specified to be 3 lines of wire mounted on extension arms and
conforming to ASTM A121 No 12-12 WampM gage wire with 4-point barbs and Class 3
zinc coating
C Line posts to be 2frac14-inch rolled ldquoHrdquo section of high carbon steel minimum weight
41 pounds per foot conforming to ASTM A36 or 2375-inch OD Schedule 40 steel
pipe minimum weight 365 pounds per foot conforming to ASTM A120
D End corner and pull posts to be 2frac12-inch square tubular steel minimum weight
579 pounds per foot conforming to ASTM A501 or 2875-inch OD Schedule 40 steel
pipe minimum weight 579 pounds per foot conforming to ASTM A120
E Swing gate posts shown in the following table to be in accordance with ASTM A120
Schedule 40 for steel pipe and ASTM A501 for steel tubing
Pipe Size OD Square Tubular Min Weight Per Ft Leaf Length
2875-inch 2frac12-inch 579 lbs Up to 6 feet
40-inch 3-inch 911 lbs Over 6 feet to 10 feet
6625-inch 1897 lbs Over 10 feet to 16 feet
F Top rails and bracing to be 1660-inch OD Schedule 40 steel pipe minimum weight
227 pounds per foot conforming to ASTM A120 in random lengths averaging 20 feet
with minimum lengths of 10 feet
G Barbed wire extension arms to be standard 45 degree one-piece three wire capacity with
steel conforming to ASTM A36
H Swing gates to be standard heavy type welded watertight rigid frame 190-inch OD
Schedule 40 steel pipe minimum weight 272 pounds per foot conforming to
ASTM A120 or 2-inch square tubular steel minimum weight 269 pounds per foot
conforming to ASTM A501
I Hot-dip galvanize component metal parts of fence (except fabric and barbed wire) with
minimum standard zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A153
J Miscellaneous
1 Tension Wire 7 gauge
2 End Caps Galvanized malleable iron - acorn style
3 End Fittings Galvanized malleable iron
4 Padlocks Furnish heavy-duty padlocks for all gates Padlocks furnished are to
be master-keyed to match OWNERrsquos existing locks (if applicable) Furnish
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 02831 ndash Page 3 of 4 Chain Link Fence - Galvanized
AECOM TBPE Firm F-3580 041318
OWNER a minimum of five (5) sets of keys Padlocks to have minimum 38Prime
hardened steel shank Master Lock No 5 or equal
202 - 204 (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
301 INSTALLATION
A Install chain link fence to the lines grades and locations shown on PLANS
B Maximum post spacing unless shown otherwise on PLANS is not to exceed 8 feet Set
posts equal to or smaller than 2375-inch OD pipe and 2frac14-inch square tubular or
ldquoHrdquo shapes 36 inches minimum into concrete Set larger posts and all gate posts
42 inches minimum into concrete Set posts in Class ldquoArdquo concrete with minimum of
6-inch concrete cover Top of concrete to be 1 inch above ground and crowned to shed
water All concrete shall be reinforced with no less than three 6 inch diameter times 2 inch
pitch spiraled loops of No 4 gage wire
C Erect fencing to generally follow ground surface and adjust irregularities in grade
Where depressions or swales are crossed by fencing provide galvanized pipe and wire
fabric laced to main fabric to prevent entrance of small animals but permit natural
drainage flow
D When shown on the PLANS a continuous concrete mowing strip shall be installed
Construct mowing strip with Class ldquoArdquo concrete finished to grade of surrounding ground
Reinforce with 6Prime times 6Prime times frac14Prime WWM Mowing strip shall not be installed between gate
posts
E Join top rails with suitable sleeve-type couplings making rigid connections with
provisions for expansion and contraction Pass rail through base of line post barbed wire
extension arm and fasten securely to terminal post
F Brace all terminal posts with brace member securely fastened to terminal and first line
post Tie terminal post near ground line to line post at brace member with steel tension
rod of 38-inch minimum diameter complete with turnbuckle
G Provide hole in barbed wire extension arms for top rail on line posts and for connection
of top rail at corner posts Extension arm to be capable of supporting 300-pound load at
end of mounted arm
H Securely fasten chain link fence wire fabric as follows
1 To terminal posts using 14-inch times 34-inch tension bars with 11-gage pressed
steel bands spaced approximately 14 inches apart
2 To line posts with 6-gauge wire clips spaced approximately 14 inches apart
3 To top rail with 9-gauge tie wires spaced approximately 24 inches apart
I CONTRACTOR to be responsible for swing gate design using same fabric as for fence
and in accordance with dimensions shown on PLANS Furnish hinges latches stops
keepers and other accessories Gate to swing open 180 degrees as shown on PLANS
with keepers to hold in open position Furnish latches with provisions for padlocking
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 02831 ndash Page 4 of 4 Chain Link Fence - Galvanized
AECOM TBPE Firm F-3580 041318
For gates less than 4-foot lengths provide latches which automatically engage when gate
swings shut
J This fence shall be grounded where a power line passes over the fence In any case a
ground shall be provided at not to exceed 1000 feet apart in straight runs of fence Each
individual section of fence shall have at least 1 ground The ground shall consist of a
copper-weld rod 8 feet long and a minimum of 58-inch in diameter driven or drilled in
vertically until the top of the rod is approximately 6 inches below the top of the ground
A No 6 solid copper conductor shall be approximately 6 inches below the top of the
ground A No 6 solid copper conductor shall be brazed to the rod and to the fence in
such a manner that each element of the fence is grounded
302 - 310 (NOT USED)
311 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section Include cost of
same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part
END OF SECTION
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 03392- Page 1 of 2 Penetrating Concrete Sealant MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
SECTION 03392
PENETRATING CONCRETE SEALANT
PART 1 GENERAL
101 SECTION INCLUDES
A Materials and procedures for applying protective penetrating concrete sealant
102 RELATED SECTIONS Not Used
103 REFERENCES
A AASHTO T 242 Standard Test Method for Frictional Properties of Paved Surfaces Using a Full-
Scale Tire
104 DEFINITIONS Not Used
105 SUBMITTALS
A Manufacturerrsquos product data specifications and recommended installation instructions
B Certification of a minimum Friction Number of 40 for at least 90 percent of friction numbers Re-
fer to AASHTO T 242
1 Applies only to traveled way surfaces where the plans require sealant
PART 2 PRODUCTS
201 PENETRATING CONCRETE SEALANTS
A Choose from the following list
1 Silane
2 Siloxane
3 SilicateSiliconate Polymer
B Physical Properties
1 Crystal clear (non-yellowing)
2 High-gloss finish
C Compliance
1 ASTM C-1315 Type I Class A
2 NCHRP 244 Chloride Ion
3 Meets USDA and ADA non-slip requirements (use of non-slip admixtures is permitted to
meet these standards
4 VOC Content lt5gL
D Acceptable products include (but ate not limited to)
1 EUCO Diamond Hard Densifier and Sealer as manufactured by Euclid Chemical
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 03392- Page 2 of 2 Penetrating Concrete Sealant MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
PART 3 EXECUTION
301 PREPARATION
A Keep surfaces dry and free of laitance dirt dust paint grease oil rust and other contaminants
B Remove any curing compound from the surface of the concrete before applying penetrating seal-
ant
C Use one of the following cleaning methods
1 Hydroblasting - 700 psi min
2 Shotblasting
3 Sandblasting
4 Etching
D Keep concrete surface matrix intact without exposing any large aggregate
E Cure concrete for 28 days before sealant application
F Obtain approval from the Architect before applying material
302 APPLICATION
A Application Rate
1 Apply according to manufacturerrsquos recommendations for each of the following surfaces
a Horizontal Unless otherwise noted all horizontal exposed concrete surfaces
within the building shall be finished with penetrating concrete sealant
B Application Drying Time Select a sealant with maximum drying time of 1frac12 hours
C Do not apply sealant to portland cement concrete pavement (PCCP) Meet the minimum Friction
Number of 40 for at least 90 percent of friction numbers when plans specify application to other
traveled way surfaces such as approach slabs bridge decks etc Refer to AASHTO T 242
END OF SECTION
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 04090 ndash Page 1 of 4 91818 Masonry AccessoriesJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
SECTION 04090
MASONRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
11 SUMMARY
A Section includes
1 Adjustable veneer anchors2 Adjustable wall ties3 Control joint filler4 Column Anchors and Ties5 Reinforcing bars6 Sheet metal ties7 Wall tie screws8 Wire joint reinforcement single Wythe type9 Masonry flashing and drainage systems
12 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A The Contract Documents are complementary what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all
B It is the CONTRACTORrsquos responsibility for scheduling and coordinating Work of subcontractors suppliers and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of CONTRACTORrsquos Work
13 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only
A ASTM International (ASTM)
1 A 82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire Plain for Concrete Reinforcement2 A 153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware3 A 615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement4 A 641 - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire5 A 951 - Standard Specification for Masonry Joint Reinforcement6 C 549 - Standard Specification for Perlite Loose Fill Insulation7 D 2000 - Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive
Applications8 D 2287 - Standard Specification for Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer and Copolymer
Molding and Extrusion Compounds
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 04090 ndash Page 2 of 4 91818 Masonry AccessoriesJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
14 ndash 15 (NOT USED)
16 SUBMITTALS
B Shop drawings
C Product data
17 ndash 111 (NOT USED)
PART 2 PRODUCTS
21ndash 22 (NOT USED)
23 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A Adjustable wall ties 2-piece zinc coated fabrications minimum 316-inch diameter steel wire formed into hook or pin and eye pieces capable of restraining compression and tension forces from veneer
1 Manufacturers one of the following or equal
a Dur-O-Wal Inc DA 518 and DA 213b AA Wire Products Co equivalent productc Wire-Bond equivalent product
B Control joint filler The key shall be of the width and shape as indicated on the Drawings In accordance with ASTM D 2000 or ASTM D 2287
1 Manufacturers one of the following or equal
a AA Wire Products Inc AA2000 Blok-Titeb Dur-O-Wall Rapid Poly-Jointc Vert-A-Joint Co Vert-A-Joint
C Foamed-in-place insulation as required by Section 07214
D Reinforcing bars in accordance with ASTM A 615 Grade 60 deformed billet steel bars
Sheet metal ties minimum [22] gauge corrosion resistant corrugated sheet metal minimum 78 inch wide by 7 inches long pre-punched for wire ties to wire joint reinforcement
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 04090 ndash Page 3 of 4 91818 Masonry AccessoriesJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
E Wire joint reinforcement single Wythe type Conforming to ASTM A 951 with ASTM A 82 9-gauge wire side rails and 9-gauge cross ties sized to suit application and galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153 Class B (minimum 15 ounces zinc per square foot
1 Manufacturers one of the following or equal
a AA Wire Products Co AA500 Blok-Lokb Dur-O-Wal Inc Ladur-typec Wire-Bond Ladder Type Series 200
F Single Wythe Concrete Masonry Drainage System stainless steel drainage strip and vertical mesh sleeve to allow moisture to drain out of single wythe system
1 Manufacturers the following or equal
a Mortar Net Inc Gary IN BN120 CMU Drainage System including the following
1) Drainage Strip BN 121 28 ga stainless steel with formed drip edge on the face edge and drainage mesh factory attached
2) Vertical Mesh Sleeve BN 122 7 X 7 X 38 inch thick polyester mesh3) Sealant as approved by manufacturer
G Masonry Drainage and Flashing System system includes flashing cavity wall drainage drip edge termination bar and weeps
1 Manufacturers the following or equal
a Mortar Net Inc Gary IN Total Flash System including the following
1) Flashing Membrane Hyload 40 mil polymetric reinforced UV stable membrane with DupPantrsquos Elvaloy KEE polymer
2) Mortar Collection DeviceWeep Tabs Recycled polyester material impregnated with UV protection biocide to resist mold and flame retardant woven mesh designed to allow moisture to migrate to the integrated weep tabs product adhered to flashing membrane 316 inch thick 10 inches high 5 frac12 feet lengths
3) Drip edge 304 stainless steel drip edge pre-attached to flashing membrane with formed drip edge
4) Adhesive as recommended by manufacturer5) Termination bar high strength corrosion resistant plastic strip with pre-drilled
holes spaced at 6 inches6) Screws as recommended by manufacturer
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 04090 ndash Page 4 of 4 91818 Masonry AccessoriesJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
31 (NOT USED)
32 (NOT USED)
33 INSTALLATION
A Install products as specified in Section 04220 and in accordance with Manufacturerrsquos installation instructions
34 ndash 310 (NOT USED)
311 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Unless otherwise indicated no separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work which is a component part
END OF SECTION
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 04100 ndash Page 1 of 5 41018 Mortar and Masonry GroutJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
SECTION 04100
MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
11 SUMMARY
A Section Includes Mortar and masonry grout
12 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A The Contract Documents are complementary what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all
B It is the CONTRACTORrsquos responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors suppliers and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of CONTRACTORrsquos Work
13 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only
A American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1 C 144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar2 C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement3 C 207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes4 C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry5 C 404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout6 C 476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry7 C 780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of
Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry
B International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO)
1 International Building Code (IBC) Standards
a ASTM C 140 - 02C ndash Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Unitsb ASTM C 1019 ndash 03 Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Grout
C The Masonry Society
1 TMS MSJC - Building Code for Masonry Structures (ACI 530ASCE 5TMS 402) Specification for Masonry Structures (ACI 5301ASCE 6TMS 602) and Commentaries
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 04100 ndash Page 2 of 5 41018 Mortar and Masonry GroutJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
14 DEFINITIONS
A Alkali Sum of sodium oxide and potassium oxide calculated as sodium oxide
15 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A Performance Requirements
1 Mortar for masonry shall be by proportion in accordance with ASTM C270 Type ldquoSrdquo except all below-grade mortar shall be Type ldquoMrdquo
2 Grout for hollow masonry units shall be by proportion in accordance with ASTM C476 and shall be normal-weight pea gravel concrete
3 Mortar color shall be submitted and determined by ENGINEER
16 SUBMITTALS
A Product Data
B Shop Drawings
C Samples Include mortar color samples
D Design Data Design Mixes for mortar and grout
E Not Used
F Submit all required LEED documentation for mandatory and desirable credits noted in paragraph 0 per the submittal requirements outlined in Section 01352
1 Materials Resources Certificates
a Certify source for local and regional materials and distance from Project site
2 Indoor Air Quality Certificates
a Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior adhesive and sealant and related primer
17 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Materials for Mortar and Grout Do not change source of materials which will affect the appearance of finished work after the work has started unless acceptable to ENGINEER
18 (NOT USED)
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 04100 ndash Page 3 of 5 41018 Mortar and Masonry GroutJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
19 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A Environmental Requirements
1 Cold Weather Requirements
a In accordance with the applicable building codeb Provide adequate equipment for heating mortar and grout materials when air
temperature is below 40 degrees Fahrenheit Temperatures of separate materials including water shall not exceed 140 degrees Fahrenheit when placed in mixer Maintain mortar temperature on boards above freezing
2 Hot Weather Requirements Wet mortar board before loading and cover mortar to retard drying when not being used
110-111 (NOT USED)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
21 MATERIALS
A Portland Cement In accordance with ASTM C 150 Type II low alkali containing maximum 06 percent total alkali
B Hydrated Lime In accordance with ASTM C 207 Type S
C Aggregate
1 Fine Aggregate In accordance with ASTM C 144 sand2 Coarse Aggregate In accordance with ASTM C 404 coarse size Number 8
D Admixtures
1 Color Admixture Type containing maximum 15 percent lime proof inorganic compounds unless recommended otherwise by manufacturer and maximum 3 percent carbon black by weight of cement with
a Factory blend for full color saturation of mortar jointb Packaging for unitized jobsite mixing at ratio of 1 unit of color per sack of portland
cement
2 Grout Admixture
a Manufacturers One of the following or equal
1) Sika Corp Sika Grout Aid Type II2) Concrete Emulsions Grout Aid GA-II
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 04100 ndash Page 4 of 5 41018 Mortar and Masonry GroutJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
3 Mortar Water Repellent Admixture
a Manufacturers must be the same manufacturer as CMU integral water repellant as specified in Section 04220 from one of the following or equal
1) WR Grace Dry Block Mortar2) Sika Corp Sikaproof 853) Master Builders Corp Omicron Mortar Proofing
4 Other Admixtures Prohibited unless accepted by the ENGINEER
E Water Clean clear potable free of oil soluble salts chemicals and other deleterious substances
22 MIXES
A Mortar Mixes
1 Mortar Mixing
a Mix on jobsite in accordance with ASTM C 270 Type S to meet performance requirements
b Mix in mechanical mixer and only in quantities needed for immediate usec Mix for minimum 3 minutes and maximum of 5 minutes after materials have been
added to mixer
2 Measurement for ingredients for mortar shall be either by volume or weight Measure by one of the following methods
a Measurement by Volume If ingredients are measured by volume measurement of sand shall be accomplished by the use of a container of known capacity
b Shovel count
3 Water shall be mixed with the dry ingredients in sufficient amount to provide a workable mixture which will adhere to the vertical surfaces of masonry units
a Use no mortar which has been standing for more than 1 hour after being mixedb Whenever 90 minutes has elapsed since last batch was mixed completely empty
mixer drum of materials and wash down before placing next batch of materials
B Grout Mixes
1 Grout Mixing
a Mix on jobsite in accordance with ASTM C 476 or in transit mixer to meet performance requirements with 8 to 10 inch slump
b Use within 90 minutes after addition of mixing waterc Mix for minimum of 5 minutes after ingredients are added and until uniform mix is
attained Grout shall have sufficient water added to produce pouring consistency without segregation
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 04100 ndash Page 5 of 5 41018 Mortar and Masonry GroutJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
2 Mix grout with coarse aggregate for cavity walls with horizontal dimension of 2 inches or more and hollow cell masonry units with minimum 4-inch cell dimensions in both horizontal directions
23 NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
31 INSTALLATION
A Install as specified in Section 04220
32 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A Testing of Grout and Mortar
1 Grout and mortar mix proportions as prescribed by the ASTM standards identified in 105B above shall be verified in the presence of the ENGINEER using standardized volume containers for all materials including a box for sand The mix volumes shall be verified daily or as determined by ENGINEER
33 ADJUSTING
A Repair of Defective Masonry
1 Remove and replace or repair defective work2 Do not patch repair or cover defective work without inspection by the ENGINEER3 Provide repairs having strength equal to or greater than specified for areas involved
304 - 310 (NOT USED)
311 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
No separate measurement and payment for work performed under this Section Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 04211- Page 1 of 9 Brick Masonry MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
SECTION 04211
BRICK MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
101 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section
102 SUMMARY
A Section Includes
1 Face brick
2 Mortar and grout
3 Ties and anchors
4 Embedded flashing
5 Miscellaneous masonry accessories
103 ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data For each type of product indicated
A Shop Drawings For the following
1 Masonry Units Show sizes profiles coursing and locations of special shapes
2 Stone Trim Units Show sizes profiles and locations of each stone trim unit required
3 Fabricated Flashing Detail corner units end-dam units and other special applications
B Samples for Initial Selection
1 Face brick
2 Colored mortar
104 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A Material Certificates For each type and size of the following
1 Masonry units
a Include data on material properties substantiating compliance with requirements
b For brick include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls
within specified tolerances
c For exposed brick include test report for efflorescence according to
ASTM C 67
2 Cementitious materials Include brand type and name of manufacturer
3 Preblended dry mortar mixes Include description of type and proportions of
ingredients
4 Grout mixes Include description of type and proportions of ingredients
5 Anchors ties and metal accessories
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 04211- Page 2 of 9 Brick Masonry MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
105 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Mockup GC shall construct for review and approval of Owner a mockup of the exterior wall
of substation building not less than 4rsquo wide and 4rsquo high and including brick CMU backup and
representative examples of flashing weeps and other accessories Mockup shall include a
mockup of the CMU jamb condition at the overhead doors
Mockup shall be completed and presented to Owner at least two weeks prior to commencement
of masonry (brick or CMU) construction Should mockup be determined by Owner not to
comply with the intent of this specification mockup shall be revised and resubmitted for
approval
Upon approval by Owner the mockup shall serve as the standard against which completed
masonry work shall be evaluated for compliance with the requirements of the Contract
B Source Limitations for Masonry Units Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and
color or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics from single source
from single manufacturer for each product required
C Source Limitations for Mortar Materials Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality
including color for exposed masonry from single manufacturer for each cementitious
component and from single source or producer for each aggregate
D Masonry Standard Comply with ACI 5301ASCE 6TMS 602 unless modified by requirements
in the Contract Documents
106 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location If units are not stored in an
enclosed location cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting securely tied If units
become wet do not install until they are dry
B Delete first two paragraphs below if requiring Contractor to use a preblended dry mortar mix
C Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms under cover and in a dry location Do not
use cementitious materials that have become damp
D Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided
E Always retain first paragraph below in case Contractor uses a preblended dry mortar mix
F Deliver preblended dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with
dispensing silos Store preblended dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms
under cover and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos
G Store masonry accessories including metal items to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt
and oil
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 04211- Page 3 of 9 Brick Masonry MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
107 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A Protection of Masonry During construction cover tops of walls projections and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each days work Cover partially completed masonry when
construction is not in progress
1 Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides of walls and hold
cover securely in place
2 Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other
wythes secure cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down face next to
unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place
B Stain Prevention Prevent grout mortar and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed or painted Immediately remove grout mortar and soil that come in contact with such
masonry
1 Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading
coverings on ground and over wall surface
2 Protect sills ledges and projections from mortar droppings
3 Protect surfaces of window and door frames as well as similar products with painted
and integral finishes from mortar droppings
4 Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from
splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry
C Cold-Weather Requirements Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost Do not build on frozen substrates Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost
or by freezing conditions Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 5301ASCE 6TMS 602
1 Cold-Weather Cleaning Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40
deg F (4 deg C) and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried but not less
than seven days after completing cleaning
D Hot-Weather Requirements Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 5301ASCE 6TMS 602
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
201 MASONRY UNITS GENERAL
A Defective Units Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to
contain chips cracks or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard Do not use units
where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work
202 BRICK
A Regional Materials Brick shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site from
materials that have been extracted harvested or recovered as well as manufactured within 500
miles (800 km) of Project site
B General Provide shapes indicated and as follows with exposed surfaces matching finish and
color of exposed faces of adjacent units
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 04211- Page 4 of 9 Brick Masonry MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
1 For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose
unfinished brick surfaces provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed
surfaces finished
2 Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate
special conditions including those at corners movement joints bond beams sashes
and lintels
3 Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size form color and texture
on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing
4 Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result
in sawed surfaces being exposed to view
C Face Brick Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216 or hollow brick complying with
ASTM C 652 Class H40V (void areas between 25 and 40 percent of gross cross-sectional area)
1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide brick complying with the
following
2 Representative product
a Acceptable products include but are not necessarily limited to Denton Blend
105 Golden Sunset modular size ruff texture brick as manufactured by Acme
Brick
3 Grade SW
4 Type FBS
5 Initial Rate of Absorption Less than 30 g30 sq in (30 g194 sq cm) per minute when
tested per ASTM C 67
6 Efflorescence Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated
not effloresced
203 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A Portland Cement ASTM C 150 Type I or II except Type III may be used for cold-weather
construction Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicat-
ed
B Hydrated Lime ASTM C 207 Type S
C Portland Cement-Lime Mix Packaged blend of Portland cement complying with ASTM C 150
Type I or Type III and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207
D Do not use Masonry Cement or Mortar Cement
E Aggregate for Mortar ASTM C 144 except for joints less than 14 inch (65 mm) thick use ag-
gregate graded with 100 percent passing the No 16 (118-mm) sieve
1 White-Mortar Aggregates Natural white sand or ground white stone
2 Colored-Mortar Aggregates Natural-colored sand or ground marble granite or other
sound stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color
F Aggregate for Grout ASTM C 404
G Mortar Pigments Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides compounded for use
in mortar mixes Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mor-
tar
H Cold-Weather Admixture Nonchloride noncorrosive accelerating admixture complying with
ASTM C 494 Type C and recommended by the manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of
composition indicated
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 04211- Page 5 of 9 Brick Masonry MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
I Water-Repellent Admixture Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with
concrete masonry units containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer
J Water Potable
K Available Mortar Products Subject to compliance with requirements products that may be in-
corporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following
1 Portland Lime Type N as manufactured by Alamo Cement
2 Color natural gray to match existing conditions adjacent
204 REINFORCEMENT
A Masonry Joint Reinforcement General ASTM A 951A 951M
205 TIES AND ANCHORS
A Materials Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that
comply with the following unless otherwise indicated
1 Hot-Dip Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire ASTM A 82A 82M with
ASTM A 153A 153M Class B-2 coating
2 Galvanized Steel Sheet ASTM A 653A 653M Commercial Steel G60 (Z180) zinc
coating
3 Steel Sheet Galvanized after Fabrication ASTM A 1008A 1008M Commercial Steel
with ASTM A 153A 153M Class B coating
B Anchor brick through rigid wall insulation with thermal wing-nut anchors equal to Type 304
Stainless Steel Hohmann amp Barnard Thermal 2-Seal Adjustable Veneer Anchors
C Wire Ties General Unless otherwise indicated size wire ties to extend at least halfway through
veneer but with at least 58-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face Outer ends of wires are bent 90
degrees and extend 2 inches (50 mm) parallel to face of veneer
206 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A Compressible Filler Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056 Grade 2A1 com-
pressible up to 35 percent of width and thickness indicated formulated from neoprene ure-
thane or PVC
B Bond-Breaker Strips Asphalt-saturated organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226
Type I (No 15 asphalt felt)
207 MASONRY CLEANERS
A Proprietary Acidic Cleaner Manufacturers standard-strength cleaner designed for removing
mortargrout stains efflorescence and other new construction stains from new masonry without
discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces Use product expressly approved for intended use by
cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 04211- Page 6 of 9 Brick Masonry MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
208 MORTAR MIXES
A General Do not use admixtures including pigments air-entraining agents accelerators
retarders water-repellent agents antifreeze compounds or other admixtures unless otherwise
indicated
1 Do not use calcium chloride in mortar
2 Use Portland cement-lime masonry cement or mortar cement mortar unless otherwise
indicated
3 Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to
view regardless of weather conditions to ensure that mortar color is consistent
B Preblended Dry Mortar Mix Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix
Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions and thoroughly blend ingredients
before delivering to Project site
C Mortar for Unit Masonry Comply with ASTM C 270 Proportion Specification Provide Type N
unless another type is indicated
D Pigmented Mortar Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other
ingredients to produce color required Do not add pigments to colored cement products
1 Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of Portland cement by weight
2 Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement or mortar cement by weight
3 Mix to match Architects sample
PART 3 - EXECUTION
301 EXAMINATION
A Examine conditions with Installer present for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work
B Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
302 INSTALLATION GENERAL
A Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry After installing
equipment complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening
B Use full-size units without cutting if possible If cutting is required to provide a continuous
pattern or to fit adjoining construction cut units with motor-driven saws provide clean sharp
unchipped edges Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified Install cut
units with cut surfaces and where possible cut edges concealed
C Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and
textures
1 Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed
D Matching Existing Masonry Match coursing bonding color and texture of brick masonry used
on existing buildings at the project site
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 04211- Page 7 of 9 Brick Masonry MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
E Wetting of Brick Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g30 sq in (30
g194 sq cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67 Allow units to absorb water so they are
damp but not wet at time of laying
303 TOLERANCES
A Dimensions and Locations of Elements
1 For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 12 inch (12
mm) or minus 14 inch (6 mm)
2 For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or
minus 12 inch (12 mm)
3 For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus
or minus 14 inch (6 mm) in a story height or 12 inch (12 mm) total
B Lines and Levels
1 For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than
14 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m) or 12 inch (12 mm) maximum
2 For conspicuous horizontal lines such as lintels sills parapets and reveals do not
vary from level by more than 18 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m) 14 inch in 20 feet (6
mm in 6 m) or 12 inch (12 mm) maximum
3 For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 14 inch in 10 feet
(6 mm in 3 m) 38 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m) or 12 inch (12 mm) maximum
4 For conspicuous vertical lines such as external corners door jambs reveals and
expansion and control joints do not vary from plumb by more than 18 inch in 10 feet
(3 mm in 3 m) 14 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) or 12 inch (12 mm) maximum
5 For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 14 inch in 10 feet (6 mm
in 3 m) 38 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m) or 12 inch (12 mm) maximum
6 For vertical alignment of exposed head joints do not vary from plumb by more than
14 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m) or 12 inch (12 mm) maximum
7 For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units do not vary from flush alignment by more
than 116 inch (15 mm) except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances
specified for warpage of units
C Joints
1 For bed joints do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 18
inch (3 mm) with a maximum thickness limited to 12 inch (12 mm) do not vary from
bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 18 inch (3 mm)
2 For exposed head joints do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or
minus 18 inch (3 mm)
3 For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond do not vary from a straight line
by more than 116 inch (15 mm) from one masonry unit to the next
304 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings movement-type joints returns and offsets
Avoid using less-than-half-size units particularly at corners jambs and where possible at
other locations
B Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry Unless otherwise indicated lay exposed masonry in
running bond do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face
dimensions at corners or jambs
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 04211- Page 8 of 9 Brick Masonry MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
C Stopping and Resuming Work Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in
course below do not tooth When resuming work clean masonry surfaces that are to receive
mortar remove loose masonry units and mortar and wet brick if required before laying fresh
masonry
305 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A Lay hollow brick as follows
1 With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed
joints
2 With entire units including areas under cells fully bedded in mortar at starting course
on footings
B Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints butter ends with sufficient
mortar to fill head joints and shove into place Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head
joints
C Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard using a jointer larger than joint
thickness unless otherwise indicated
306 REPAIRING POINTING AND CLEANING
A Remove and replace masonry units that are loose chipped broken stained or otherwise
damaged or that do not match adjoining units Install new units to match adjoining units install
in fresh mortar pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement
B Pointing During the tooling of joints enlarge voids and holes except weep holes and
completely fill with mortar Point up joints including corners openings and adjacent
construction to provide a neat uniform appearance Prepare joints for sealant application where
indicated
C In-Progress Cleaning Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar
fins and smears before tooling joints
D Final Cleaning After mortar is thoroughly set and cured clean exposed masonry as follows
1 Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape
hoes or chisels
2 Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel leave one-half of panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes
3 Obtain Architects approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of
masonry
4 Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering
them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof
masking tape
5 Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners remove cleaners promptly by
rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water
6 Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical
Notes 20
7 Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturers
written instructions
8 Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable
to type of stain on exposed surfaces
9 Clean stone trim to comply with stone suppliers written instructions
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 04211- Page 9 of 9 Brick Masonry MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
10 Clean limestone units to comply with recommendations in ILIs Indiana Limestone
Handbook
307 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A Salvageable Materials Unless otherwise indicated excess masonry materials are Contractors
property At completion of unit masonry work remove from Project site
B Waste Disposal as Fill Material Dispose of clean masonry waste including excess or soil-
contaminated sand waste mortar and broken masonry units by crushing and mixing with fill
material as fill is placed
1 Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches (100 mm) in each dimension
2 Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of
masonry waste Fill material is specified in Division 31 Section Earth Moving
3 Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade
C Excess Masonry Waste Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill as
described above and other masonry waste and legally dispose of off Owners property
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 04220 ndash Page 1 of 11 11619 Concrete Masonry Units Jose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
SECTION 04220
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
11 SUMMARY
A Section Includes Concrete masonry units and accessories
12 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A The Contract Documents are complementary what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all
B It is the CONTRACTORrsquos responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors suppliers and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of CONTRACTORrsquos Work
13 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only
A American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1 C 90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units 2 C 140 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and
Related Units 3 C 426 - Standard Test Method for Linear Drying Shrinkage of Concrete Masonry Units
14 DEFINITIONS
A Standard Level of Quality High quality but conventional nearly free of chips cracks or other imperfections detracting from appearance when discernible and identified from distance of 20 feet under diffused lighting When level of quality is not specified Standard Level of Quality shall be assumed
15 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A LEED Requirements
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 04220 ndash Page 2 of 11 11619 Concrete Masonry Units Jose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
16 SUBMITTALS
A Product Data Submit manufacturerrsquos product data for block
B Samples Include samples of stretcher units in sufficient quantity to illustrate color range
C Test Reports
1 Compressive strength 2 Linear shrinkage 3 Moisture content as a percentage of total absorbtion 4 Total absorbtion 5 Unit weight
D Submit all required LEED documentation for mandatory and desirable credits noted in paragraph 105 per the submittal requirements outlined in Section 01352
1 Materials Resources Certificates
a Certify recycled material content for recycled content products b Certify source for local and regional materials and distance from Project site
2 Indoor Air Quality Certificates
a Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior adhesive and sealant and related primer
17 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Mock-Up
1 Prior to starting construction of masonry construct minimum 4 foot square mock-up 2 Use accepted materials containing each different kind and color of concrete masonry
units and water repellant to illustrate wall design 3 When not accepted construct another mock-up 4 When accepted mock-up will be standard of comparison for remainder of masonry work 5 Upon completion of Project dispose of mock-ups in legal manner at offsite location in
accordance with Section 01505
B Pre-Installation Conference Conduct as specified in Section 01200
18 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A Transport and handle concrete masonry units as required to prevent discoloration chipping and breakage
B Store masonry units off the ground in a dry location covered and protected from absorbing moisture Locate storage piles stacks and bins to protect materials from heavy traffic
C Remove chipped cracked and otherwise defective units from jobsite upon discovery
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 04220 ndash Page 3 of 11 11619 Concrete Masonry Units Jose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
19 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A Environmental Requirements
1 Cold Weather Requirements
a In accordance with applicable building code provide adequate equipment for heating masonry materials when air temperature is below 40 degrees Fahrenheit
2 Hot Weather Requirements
a In accordance with applicable building code when ambient air temperature exceeds 100 degrees Fahrenheit or when ambient air temperature exceeds 90 degrees Fahrenheit and wind velocity is greater than 8 miles per hour implement hot weather protection procedures
b Wet mortar board before loading and cover mortar to retard drying when not being used
c Do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches ahead of placing masonry units d Place masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar
B Sequencing and Scheduling
1 Order concrete masonry units well before start of installation to ensure adequate time for manufacturing and minimum 28 days for curing and drying before start of installation Protect from weather after curing period to avoid moisture increase
110 - 111 (NOT USED)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
21 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A Hollow Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units
1 Class Class 3 in accordance with ASTM C 90 Standard Level of Quality with minimum compressive strength of 1900 pounds per square inch
2 Surface Texture Standard and split face with dense faces suitable for painting where scheduled to be painted
3 Finish Color of block to be selected from the manufacturerrsquos full range of standard integral colors (subject to availability)
a Normal-weight aggregate standard (smooth) finish
4 Typical Size 8 or 12 inches wide by 8 inches high by 16 inches long unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or other sizes as needed to minimize cutting
5 Special Sizes and Shapes As required for window and door openings bond beams piers lintels control joints and other special applications to minimize cutting
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 04220 ndash Page 4 of 11 11619 Concrete Masonry Units Jose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
6 Recycled Content Min 50 percent Pre-Consumer 7 Manufacturers One of the following or equal
a Featherlite Corp
B Anchor Bolts As specified in Section 05120
C Steel Reinforcement As specified in Section 04090
D Wall Ties As specified in Section 04090
E Wire Joint Reinforcement As specified in Section 04090
22 ACCESSORIES
A Control joint As specified in 04090
B Integral water repellant for all masonry units (added during manufacture) and in all mortar (added during mortar mixing) shall be ldquoDry-Block II Admixturerdquo by WR Grace Krete Industries or approved equal liquid polymeric admixture at rates as recommended by the manufacturer The same product shall be used in masonry units and in mortar
C Sealant Subsequent to erection all exposed surfaces of CMU shall be treated with a clear silanesiloxane penetrating sealant applied in accordance with manufacturerrsquos recommendations
1 Approved sealants include (but not limited to) a Prime-A-Pell 200 as manufactured by Tnemec Inc b Intraguard as manufactured by WR Meadows Inc
D Flashing for single-wythe CMU exterior As specified in 04090
PART 3 - EXECUTION
31 PREPARATION
A Protection
1 Protect adjacent construction with appropriate means from mortar droppings and other effects of laying of concrete masonry units
B Surface Preparation
1 Thoroughly clean foundations of laitance grease oil mud dirt mortar droppings and other matter that will reduce bond
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 04220 ndash Page 5 of 11 11619 Concrete Masonry Units Jose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
32 INSTALLATION
A Forms and Shores
1 Where Required Construct Forms to the Shapes indicated on the Drawings
a Construct forms sufficiently rigid to prevent deflection which may result in cracking or other damage to supported masonry and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout
b Do not remove supporting forms or shores until the supported masonry has acquired sufficient strength to support safely its weight and any construction loads to which it may be subjected
1) Wait at least 24 hours after grouting masonry columns or walls before applying uniform loads
2 Wait at least 72 hours before applying concentrated loads
B Concrete Masonry Units
1 Provide Standard Level of Quality 2 Lay concrete masonry units dry 3 Lay units in uniform and true courses level plumb and without projections or offset of
adjacent units 4 Lay units to preserve unobstructed vertical continuity of cells to be filled with grout or
insulation 5 Align vertical cells to be filled with grout to maintain clear unobstructed continuous
vertical cell measuring not less than 2 by 3 inches 6 Place mortar with full coverage of joints at webs of all cells and face shells 7 Butter vertical head joints for thickness equal to face shell thickness of units and shove
joints tightly together so that mortar bonds to both masonry units 8 Solidly fill joints from face of units to inside face of cells 9 Lay units to desired height with joints of uniform thickness 10 Bond shall be plumb throughout 11 Lay units to avoid formation of cracks when units are placed Keep cells of units as free
of mortar as possible as masonry wall height increases 12 When positions of units shift after mortar has stiffened bond is broken or cracks are
formed relay units in new mortar 13 Remove mortar mortar droppings debris and other obstructions and materials from
inside of cell walls to receive grout or insulation 14 Seal cleanouts after inspection and before grouting or placing insulation
C Bond Pattern
1 Lay concrete masonry units in running bond pattern unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings
D Foamed-In-Place Insulation
1 Where indicated on the Drawings fill concrete masonry unit cells of building exterior walls that are not to be filled with reinforcing and grout with foamed-in-place insulation
E Mortar Joints
1 Make joints straight clean smooth and uniform in thickness
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 04220 ndash Page 6 of 11 11619 Concrete Masonry Units Jose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
2 Tool exposed joints slightly concave Strike concealed joints flush 3 Make vertical and horizontal joints 38 inch thick 4 Where fresh masonry joins totally or partially set masonry clean and roughen set
masonry before laying new units
F Wire Joint Reinforcement
1 Lap splice longitudinal wire joint reinforcement minimum 75 wire diameters 2 Place longitudinal wires in approximate centers of mortar beds with minimum 58-inch
mortar cover on exposed faces 3 Provide intersecting masonry walls with prefabricated wire joint reinforcement tees 4 Rake intersecting joints 12 inch and caulk joints
G Grouting and Reinforcement
1 Where horizontal and vertical bars are spliced and adjacent lap splices are separated by more than 3 inches the lap splice length shall be 72 bar diameters Where adjacent lap splices are separated by 3 inches or less the lap splice length shall be increased by 13 times or the lap splices shall be staggered at least 24 bar diameters with no increase in length
2 Hold vertical reinforcing bars in position at top and bottom and at intervals not exceeding 200 bar diameters Use steel wire bar positioners to position bars Tie reinforcing bars to dowels with wire ties
3 Obtain acceptance of reinforcement placement before grouting 4 Unless specified on drawings fill spaces and cells containing reinforcing bars solidly
with grout
a Low-Lift Grouting
1) Hollow unit masonry to be grouted by the low lift method shall be constructed and grouted in lifts not exceeding 5 feet
2) Slushing with mortar will not be permitted
b High-Lift Grouting
1) If grouting is accomplished by the high-lift method double wythe masonry shall be allowed to cure at least 72 hours
2) Hollow unit masonry shall be allowed to cure at least 24 hours before grouting
3) In double wythe construction vertical grout barriers shall be built across the grout space to the height of the grout lift Grout barriers shall not be spaced more than 30 feet apart
4) Grout shall be placed in lifts not to exceed 6 feet in depth 5) Each lift shall be allowed to set for 10 minutes after initial consolidation of
grout before successive lift is placed 6) The full height of each section of wall shall be grouted in one day
5 Grout in cells shall have full contact with surface of concrete footings 6 When grouting stops for one hour or longer form horizontal construction joints by
stopping grout placement 1-12 inches below top of uppermost unit containing grout
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 04220 ndash Page 7 of 11 11619 Concrete Masonry Units Jose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
7 After placement consolidate grout using mechanical immersion vibrators designed for consolidating grout
8 Placement
a Use a hand bucket concrete hopper or grout pump b Place grout in final position within 1-12 hours after mixing Place grout so as to
completely fill the grout spaces without segregation of the aggregates c Do not insert vibrators into lower grout placements that are in a semi-solidified
state
H Bond Beams
1 Place horizontal reinforcement and solidly grout bond beam units in place 2 Provide wire mesh at openings in bottom of bond beams to support grout where walls are
not grouted solid
I Cutting Concrete Masonry Units
1 When possible use full units of the proper size in lieu of cut units Cut units as required to form chases openings for anchorage and for other appurtenances
2 Cut and fit units with power-driven carborundum or diamond disc blade saw
J Control Joints
1 Provide in masonry walls at locations indicated on the Drawings 2 Make full height and continuous in appearance 3 Run bond beams and bond beam reinforcing bars continuously through control joints 4 Insert control joint filler in joints as wall is constructed 5 Apply sealant as specified in Section 07900
K Openings and Lintels
1 Place horizontal reinforcement in fully grouted bond beam units 2 Use lintel block units where underside of lintel will be exposed 3 Provide minimum of 8-inch bearing at each end of lintel 4 Embed reinforcing bars minimum 24 inches or 48 bar diameters whichever is longer
into wall past edges of openings or as indicated on the Drawings
a At corners provide 90-degree bend with equivalent total embedment
L Steel Door Frames
1 Anchor and fully grout jambs and head of steel door frames connected to concrete unit masonry
2 Fill frames with grout as each 2 feet of concrete unit masonry is laid
M Bearing Plates
1 Provide minimum of 12 inches of grouted concrete unit masonry below steel bearing plates and beams bearing on masonry walls
N Anchor Bolts
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 04220 ndash Page 8 of 11 11619 Concrete Masonry Units Jose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
1 Hold anchor bolts in place with template during grouting to assure precise alignment 2 Do not cut or ream members being anchored or use other means to accommodate
misaligned anchor bolts in roof deck support angles 3 Provide minimum 6-inch wide grouted concrete unit masonry entirely around anchor
bolts and other attachment devices
O Wall Ties
1 In composite or cavity 2 wythe walls bond masonry units together by embedding wall ties with a minimum of one per 4-12 square feet of wall area
2 Stagger ties in alternate courses with maximum vertical distance between ties at 18 inches on center and maximum horizontal distance between ties at 36 inches on center
P Enclosures
1 Where concrete masonry units enclose conduit pipes stacks ducts and similar items construct chases cavities and similar spaces as required whether or not such spaces are indicated on the Drawings
2 Point openings around flush mounted electrical outlet boxes with mortar including flush joints above boxes
3 Do not cover enclosures until inspected and when appropriate tested
Q Other Embedded Items
1 Build in wall plugs accessories flashings pipe sleeves and other items required to be built-in as the masonry work progresses
R Patching
1 Patch exposed concrete masonry units at completion of the Work and in such manner that patching will be indistinguishable from similar surroundings and adjoining construction
S Water Curing
1 Protect concrete masonry units from drying too rapidly by frequently fogging or sprinkling so walls will always be visibly damp for minimum 3 days
T Miscellaneous
1 Build in required items such as anchors flashings sleeves frames structural steel lintels anchor bolts and metal fabrications as required for complete installation
U External Water Repellent
1 Apply according to manufacturerrsquos recommendations
V Grouting Equipment
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 04220 ndash Page 9 of 11 11619 Concrete Masonry Units Jose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
1 Grout Pumps
a Do not pump grout through aluminum tubes b Operate pumps to produce a continuous stream of grout without air pockets c Upon completion of each days pumping eject grout from pipeline without
contamination or segregation of the grout
1) Remove waste materials and debris from the equipment 2) Dispose of waste materials debris and all flushing water outside the
masonry
2 Vibrators
a Internal vibrators shall maintain a speed of not less than 5000 impulses per minute when submerged in the grout
b Maintain at least 1 spare vibrator at the site at all times c Apply vibrators at uniformly spaced points not further apart than the visible
effectiveness of the machine d Limit duration of vibration to time necessary to produce satisfactory consolidation
without causing segregation
33 CONSTRUCTION
A Site Tolerances Lay masonry plumb true to line and with courses level Keep bond pattern plumb throughout Lay masonry within the following tolerances
1 Maximum variation from the plumb in the lines and surfaces of columns walls and in the flutes and surfaces of fluted or split faced blocks
a In Adjacent Masonry Units 18 inch b In 10 Feet 14 inch c In Any Story or 20 Feet maximum 38 inch d In 40 Feet or More 12 inch
2 Maximum variations from the plumb for external corners expansion joints and other conspicuous lines
a In Any Story or 20 Feet Maximum 14 inch b In 40 Feet or More 12 inch
3 Maximum variations from the level or grades indicated on the Drawings for exposed lintels sills parapets horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines
a In Any Bay or 20 Feet Maximum 14 inch b In 40 Feet or more 12 inch
4 Maximum variations of the linear building lines from established position in plan and related portion of columns walls and partitions
a In Any Bay or 20 Feet Maximum 12 inch
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 04220 ndash Page 10 of 11 11619 Concrete Masonry Units Jose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
b In 40 Feet or More 34 inch
5 Maximum variation in cross sectional dimensions of columns and in thickness of walls
a Minus 14 inch b Plus 12 inch
34 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A Site Tests
1 OWNER will have tests performed by an independent laboratory 2 Have minimum 3 concrete masonry units of each type proposed for Project tested in
accordance with ASTM C 90 C 140 and C 426 to verify conformance to Specifications 3 Tests shall include compressive strength linear shrinkage moisture content as percent of
total absorption total absorption and unit weight
B Special Inspection
1 OWNER will employ a qualified masonry special inspector for continuous special inspection of the masonry work Acceptance by a State or municipality having a program of examining and certifying masonry inspectors will be considered adequate qualifications The masonry inspector shall be at the site during all masonry construction and perform the following duties
a Review Drawings and Specifications and meet with the CONTRACTOR to discuss requirements before work commences
b Before masonry work commences CONTRACTOR and the CONTRACTORs Quality Control Representative shall attend meeting with ENGINEER to review the requirements for surveillance and quality control of the masonry work
c Check brand and type of cement lime (if used) and source of sand d Verify that foundation is clean rough and ready to receive units e Check reinforcing steel dowels for correct location straightness proper alignment
spacing size and length f Observe field proportioning of mortar Visually check aggregate to determine
uniformity of grading cleanliness and moisture g Verify that joints are full of mortar and kept tight during work Inspect grout cells
to verify that fins will not interfere with grouting Verify that masons keep grout cells clean of mortar droppings and inspect to determine compliance
h Continuously observe placing of grout i Perform or supervise performance of required sampling and testing
2 Keep complete record of inspections Report daily to the Building Official CONTRACTORs Quality Control Representative ENGINEER and OWNER the progress of the masonry inspection
35 CLEANING
A Exercise extreme care to prevent mortar splotches
B Do not attach construction supports to concrete masonry walls
C Wash off concrete scum and grout spills before scum and grout set
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 04220 ndash Page 11 of 11 11619 Concrete Masonry Units Jose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
D Remove grout stains from walls
E Clean exposed masonry Remove scaffolding and equipment Dispose of debris refuse and surplus material offsite legally
F Remove efflorescence on exposed surfaces with commercially prepared cleaning solution acceptable to masonry unit manufacturer
1 Apply cleaning solution in accordance with cleaning solution manufacturers printed instructions
2 Do not use muriatic acid as cleaning solution 3 Do not use high pressure cleaning equipment
36 PROTECTION
A Provide temporary protection for exposed masonry corners subject to damage
B Bracing
1 Unless wall is adequately supported by permanent supporting elements so wall will not overturn or collapse adequately brace masonry walls over 8 feet in height to prevent overturning and to prevent collapse
2 Keep bracing in place until permanent supporting elements of structure are in place
C Limited Access Zone
1 Establish limited access zone prior to start of masonry wall construction 2 Zone shall be immediately adjacent to wall and equal to height of wall to be constructed
plus 4 feet by entire length of wall on unscaffolded side of wall 3 Limit access to zone to workers actively engaged in constructing wall Do not permit
other persons to enter zone 4 Keep zone in place until wall is adequately supported or braced by permanent supporting
elements to prevent overturning and collapse
307 - 310 (NOT USED)
311 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
No separate measurement and payment for work performed under this Section Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 05120 ndash Page 1 of 5 41018 Structural SteelJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
SECTION 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
11 SUMMARY
A Section Includes
1 Structural steel2 Grout
12 DEFINITIONS
A Structural Steel Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in AISC 303 Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges
13 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A Product Data For each type of product
B Shop Drawings Show fabrication of structural-steel components
14 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A Welding certificates
B Mill test reports for structural steel including chemical and physical properties
C Source quality-control reports
15 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Welding Qualifications Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D11D11M Structural Welding Code - Steel
B Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents
1 AISC 3032 AISC 3603 RCSCs Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 05120 ndash Page 2 of 5 41018 Structural SteelJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
21 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS
A W-Shapes ASTM A 992A 992M
B Channels Angles S-Shapes ASTM A 36A 36M
C Plate and Bar ASTM A 36A 36M
D Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections ASTM A 500A 500M Grade B structural tubing
E Steel Pipe ASTM A 53A 53M Type E or Type S Grade B
F Welding Electrodes Comply with AWS requirements
22 BOLTS CONNECTORS AND ANCHORS
A High-Strength Bolts Nuts and Washers ASTM A 325 Type 1 heavy-hex steel structural bolts ASTM A 563 Grade C heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts and ASTM F 436 Type 1 hardened carbon-steel washers all with plain finish
B Threaded Rods ASTM A 36A 36M
1 Finish Hot-dip zinc coating ASTM A 153A 153M Class C
23 PRIMER
A Primer Fabricators standard lead- and chromate-free non-asphaltic rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI79 and compatible with topcoat
24 GROUT
A Nonmetallic Shrinkage-Resistant Grout ASTM C 1107C 1107M factory-packaged nonmetallic aggregate grout noncorrosive and non-staining mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time
25 FABRICATION
A Structural Steel Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible Fabricate according to AISC 303 Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges and to AISC 360
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 05120 ndash Page 3 of 5 41018 Structural SteelJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
26 SHOP CONNECTIONS
A High-Strength Bolts Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSCs Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts for type of bolt and type of joint specified
1 Joint Type Snug tightened
B Weld Connections Comply with AWS D11D11M for tolerances appearances welding procedure specifications weld quality and methods used in correcting welding work
27 SHOP PRIMING
A Shop prime steel surfaces except the following
1 Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches
2 Surfaces to be field welded3 Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing)4 Galvanized surfaces5 Surfaces enclosed in interior construction
B Surface Preparation Clean surfaces to be painted Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter slag or flux deposits Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards
1 SSPC-SP 2 Hand Tool Cleaning2 SSPC-SP 3 Power Tool Cleaning
C Priming Immediately after surface preparation apply primer according to manufacturers written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mils Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints corners edges and exposed surfaces
PART 3 - EXECUTION
31 EXAMINATION
A Verify with certified steel erector present elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods bearing plates and other embedment elements for compliance with requirements
B Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 05120 ndash Page 4 of 5 41018 Structural SteelJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
32 ERECTION
A Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360
B Baseplates and Bearing Plates Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates Clean bottom surface of plates
1 Set plates for structural members on wedges shims or setting nuts as required2 Weld plate washers to top of baseplate3 Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed
Do not remove wedges or shims but if protruding cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout
4 Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain Neatly finish exposed surfaces protect grout and allow to cure Comply with manufacturers written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts
C Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303 Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges
33 FIELD CONNECTIONS
A High-Strength Bolts Install high-strength bolts according to RCSCs Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts for type of bolt and type of joint specified
1 Joint Type Snug tightened
B Weld Connections Comply with AWS D11D11M for tolerances appearances welding procedure specifications weld quality and methods used in correcting welding work
1 Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing alignment adequacy of temporary connections and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds
34 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A Testing Agency Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections
B Bolted Connections Inspect bolted connections according to RCSCs Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts
C Welded Connections Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D11D11M
1 In addition to visual inspection test and inspect field welds according to AWS D11D11M and the following inspection procedures at testing agencys option
a Liquid Penetrant Inspection ASTM E 165b Magnetic Particle Inspection ASTM E 709 performed on root pass and on
finished weld Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 05120 ndash Page 5 of 5 41018 Structural SteelJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
c Ultrasonic Inspection ASTM E 164d Radiographic Inspection ASTM E 94
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 05210 ndash Page 1 of 3 41018 Steel JoistsJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
SECTION 05210
STEEL JOISTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
11 SUMMARY
A Section Includes
1 Gable steel joists2 K-series steel joist substitutes3 Joist accessories
12 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A Product Data For each type of joist accessory and product
B Shop Drawings
1 Include layout designation number type location and spacing of joists2 Include joining and anchorage details bracing bridging and joist accessories splice and
connection locations and details and attachments to other construction
13 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A Welding certificates
B Manufacturer certificates
14 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Manufacturer Qualifications A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with applicable standard specifications and load tables in SJIs Specifications
1 Manufacturers responsibilities include providing professional engineering services for designing special joists to comply with performance requirements
B Welding Qualifications Qualify field-welding procedures and personnel according to AWS D11D11M Structural Welding Code - Steel
15 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A Deliver store and handle joists as recommended in SJIs Specifications
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 05210 ndash Page 2 of 3 41018 Steel JoistsJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
21 K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS
A Steel Joist Substitutes Manufacture according to Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists K-Series in SJIs Specifications with steel-angle or -channel members
22 GABLE STEEL JOISTS
A Manufacture steel joists according to Standard Specifications for Longspan Steel Joists LH-Series and Deep Longspan Steel Joists DLH-Series in SJIs Specifications with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members of joist type and end and top-chord arrangements as indicated
23 PRIMERS
A Primer SSPC-Paint 15 or manufacturers standard shop primer complying with performance requirements in SSPC-Paint 15
24 JOIST ACCESSORIES
A Bridging Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of diagonal bridging of material size and type required by SJIs Specifications for type of joist chord size spacing and span Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability
B Furnish miscellaneous accessories including splice plates and bolts required by joist manufacturer to complete joist assembly
25 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING
A Clean and remove loose scale heavy rust and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories
B Apply one coat of shop primer
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 05210 ndash Page 3 of 3 41018 Steel JoistsJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
31 INSTALLATION
A Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured
B Install joists and accessories plumb square and true to line securely fasten to supporting construction according to SJIs Specifications joist manufacturers written recommendations and requirements in this Section
1 Before installation splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece2 Space adjust and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening3 Install temporary bracing and erection bridging connections and anchors to ensure that
joists are stabilized during construction
C Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placement of joists Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding appearance and quality of welds and methods used in correcting welding work
D Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection before construction loads are applied Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams
32 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A Testing Agency Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test and inspection reports
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 05310 ndash Page 1 of 4 41018 Steel DeckJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
SECTION 05310
STEEL DECK
PART 1 - GENERAL
11 SUMMARY
A Section Includes
1 Roof deck
12 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A Product Data For each type of deck accessory and product indicated
B Shop Drawings
1 Include layout and types of deck panels anchorage details reinforcing channels pans cut deck openings special jointing accessories and attachments to other construction
13 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A Welding certificates
B Product certificates
C Evaluation reports
14 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Welding Qualifications Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D13 Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel
15 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A Protect steel deck from corrosion deformation and other damage during delivery storage and handling
B Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 05310 ndash Page 2 of 4 41018 Steel DeckJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
21 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A AISI Specifications Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISIs North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members
22 ROOF DECK
A Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following
1 CMC Joist amp Deck2 Consolidated Systems Inc Metal Dek Group3 Nucor Corp Vulcraft Group4 Verco Manufacturing Co5 Wheeling Corrugating Company Div of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation
B Roof Deck Fabricate panels without top-flange stiffening grooves to comply with SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck in SDI Publication No 31 and with the following
1 Galvanized-Steel Sheet ASTM A 653A 653M Structural Steel (SS) Grade 33 G60 zinc coating
2 Deck Profile Type IR intermediate rib3 Profile Depth 1-12 inches4 Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness 00358 inch5 Span Condition Triple span or more6 Side Laps Overlapped
23 ACCESSORIES
A General Provide manufacturers standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated
B Mechanical Fasteners Corrosion-resistant low-velocity power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners or self-drilling self-threading screws
C Side-Lap Fasteners Corrosion-resistant hexagonal washer head self-drilling carbon-steel screws No 10 minimum diameter
D Flexible Closure Strips Vulcanized closed-cell synthetic rubber
E Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories Steel sheet minimum yield strength of 33000 psi not less than 00359-inch design uncoated thickness of same material and finish as deck of profile indicated or required for application
F Galvanizing Repair Paint ASTM A 780
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 05310 ndash Page 3 of 4 41018 Steel DeckJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
31 EXAMINATION
A Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance
B Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
32 INSTALLATION GENERAL
A Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No 31 manufacturers written instructions and requirements in this Section
B Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks
C Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection
D Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck
E Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength continuity of deck and support of other work
F Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding appearance and quality of welds and methods used for correcting welding work
G Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturers written instructions
H Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories Install ridge and valley plates finish strips end closures and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturers written instructions Weld or mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation
1 Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels unless otherwise indicated
33 ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION
A Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-12 inches long and as follows
1 Weld Diameter 58 inch nominal2 Weld Spacing Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of two welds
per deck unit at each support Space welds 12 inches apart in the field of roof and 6 inches apart in roof corners and perimeter based on roof-area definitions in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 05310 ndash Page 4 of 4 41018 Steel DeckJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
B Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 12 of the span or 18 inches and as follows
1 Mechanically fasten with self-drilling No 10 diameter or larger carbon-steel screws2 Fasten with a minimum of 1-12-inch-long welds
C End Bearing Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-12 inches with end joints as follows
1 End Joints Lapped 2 inches minimum or butted at Contractors option
D Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories Install ridge and valley plates finish strips end closures and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturers written instructions Weld or mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation
1 Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels unless otherwise indicated
E Flexible Closure Strips Install flexible closure strips over partitions walls and where indicated Install with adhesive according to manufacturers written instructions to ensure complete closure
34 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A Testing Agency Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections
B Field welds will be subject to inspection Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Engineer
C Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements
D Additional inspecting at Contractors expense will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements
35 PROTECTION
A Galvanizing Repairs Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturers written instructions
END OF SECTION
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 05500 ndash Page 1 of 10 41018 Metal FabricationsJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
11 SUMMARY
A Section Includes
1 Metal grating stair tread2 Aluminum stair nosing3 Concrete inserts4 Ladders5 Metal gratings6 Metal tread plate7 Preformed channel pipe supports8 Stairs9 Miscellaneous metals10 Associated accessories to the above items
12 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A The Contract Documents are complementary what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all
B It is the CONTRACTORrsquos responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors suppliers and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the CONTRACTORrsquos Work
13 REFERENCES
The publications listed below for a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only
A Aluminum Association (AA)
1 Specification M12-C22-A41 - Aluminum Finishes
B American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
1 Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 05500 ndash Page 2 of 10 41018 Metal FabricationsJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
C American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1 A 36A 36M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel2 A 48 - Standard Specification for Grey Iron Castings3 A 53 - Standard Specification for Pipe Steel Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated
Welded and Seamless4 A 123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
Products5 A 240 - Standard Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel
Stainless Steel Plate Sheet and Strip for Pressure Vessels6 A 269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel
Tubing for General Service7 A 276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes8 A 307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs 60000 PSI Tensile
Strength9 A 325 - Standard Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints10 A 489 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Lifting Eyes11 A 490 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Steel Structural Bolts 150 ksi Minimum
Tensile Strength12 A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes13 A 501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing14 A 569 - Standard Specification for Steel Carbon (015 Maximum Percent) Hot-Rolled
Sheet and Strip Commercial Quality15 A 570A 570M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet and Strip Carbon Hot-Rolled
Structural Quality16 A 635A 635M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet and Strip Heavy-Thickness
Coils Carbon Hot-Rolled17 A 653A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process18 [A 992A 992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes]19 B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate20 B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars
Rods Wire Profiles and Tubes21 B 308 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural
Profiles22 B 429 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube23 F 593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts Hex Cap Screws and Studs
D American Welding Society (AWS)
1 Standard Symbols for Welding Brazing and Nondestructive Examination
E National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM)
1 Metal Finishes Manual
F Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
1 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 29 Labor Pt 1900-1990
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 05500 ndash Page 3 of 10 41018 Metal FabricationsJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
14 - 15 (NOT USED)
16 SUBMITTALS
A Product Data
1 Metal grating stair tread2 Aluminum stair nosing3 Metal grating
B Shop Drawings
1 Ladders2 Metal grating3 Metal tread plate4 Stairs5 Miscellaneous metals
C Quality Control Submittals
1 Design data and calculations Stairs and ladders to include drawings and calculations signed and sealed by ENGINEER registered in the State of Texas
2 Test Reports
a Gratings
1) Grating manufacturers calculations showing that gratings will meet specified design load stress and deflection requirements for each size grating for each span
2) Reports of tests performed
17 - 111 (NOT USED)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
21 MANUFACTURERS (NOT USED)
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 05500 ndash Page 4 of 10 41018 Metal FabricationsJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
22 MATERIALS
A General Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings structural and miscellaneous metals shall conform with the standards of the ASTM including the following
ItemASTMStandard No
Class GradeType or Alloy No
Cast IronCast Iron A 48 Class 40BSteelGalvanized sheet iron or steel A 653 Coating G90Black steel sheet or strip A 569
A 570--
Coil (plate) A 635 --Structural plate bars rolled shapes and miscellaneous items (except W shapes)
A 36 --
Rolled W shapes A 992 Grade 50Standard bolts nuts and washers A 307 --High strength bolts nuts and hardened flat washers
A 325A 490
--
Eyebolts A 489 Type 1Tubing cold-formed A 500 --Tubing hot-formed A 501 --Steel pipe A 53 Grade BStainless steelPlate sheet and strip A 240 Type 304 or 316Bars and shapes A 276 Type 304 or 316Bolts (Type 304) F593 Group 1 Condition CWBolts (Type 316) F593 Group 2 Condition CWAluminumFlashing sheet aluminum B 209 Alloy 5005-H14
0032 inches minimum thickness
Structural sheet aluminum- B 209 Alloy 6061-T6Structural aluminum B 209
B 308Alloy 6061-T6
Extruded aluminum B 221 Alloy 6063-T42 Use Type 304L if material will be welded Use Type 316L if material will be welded
1 Stainless steels are designated by type or series defined by ASTM2 Where stainless steel is welded use low-carbon stainless steel
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 05500 ndash Page 5 of 10 41018 Metal FabricationsJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
23 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A Metal Grating Stair Tread
1 Material Welded steel grating tread with non-slip nosing and integral end plates for bolt on attachment to stair stringers Manufactured and galvanized per subsection 203E3below
2 Size
a Tread Width To equal tread spacing plus 1 inch minimumb Tread Length Length to suit stringer to stringer dimension indicated on the
Drawingsc Depth 1-34 inches
3 Bolts Type 304 stainless steel
B Aluminum Stair Nosing
1 Manufacturers One of the following or equal
a Wooster Products Inc Type 101 Nosingb American Safety Tread Co Inc Style 801 Nosing
2 Material Cast aluminum abrasive nosings with aluminum oxide granules integrally cast into metal forming permanent nonslip long-wearing surface
3 For installation in cast-in-place stairs4 Configuration 4 inches wide fabricated with integrally cast stainless steel anchors at
approximately 12-inch centers Length to extend within 3 inches of stair edge on each side
C Concrete Inserts
1 Concrete inserts for supporting pipe and other applications are specified in Section 15061
D Ladders
1 General
a Type Safety type conforming to local State and Occupational Safety and Health Administration standards as minimum Furnish guards for ladder wells
b Size 18 inches wide between side rails of length size shape detail and location indicated on the Drawings
2 Metal Ladders
a Materials 6063-T5 aluminum alloy except where submerged or where specifically called for Type 304L stainless steel
b Rungs
1) Corrugated dimpled skid-resistance and shaped to prevent slipping off the end of rung
2) Capable of withstanding 1000-pound load without failure
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 05500 ndash Page 6 of 10 41018 Metal FabricationsJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
c Side Rails Minimum 4-inch by 12-inch flat barsd Fabrication
1) Welded construction of size shape location and details indicated on the Drawings
2) For ladders over 20 feet high fall prevention system designed in accordance with State and Occupational Safety and Health Administration requirements
e Fall Prevention System Include but not limit to railing brackets clamps 2 sleeves and 2 belts satisfying Occupational Safety and Health Administration safe climbing requirements
1) Manufacturers One of the following or equal
a) North Consumer Products Saf-T-Climb
E Metal Gratings
1 General
a Fabricate grating to cover areas indicated on the Drawingsb Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings grating over an opening shall cover
entire openingc Make cutouts in grating where required for equipment access or protrusion
including valve operators or stems and gate framesd Band Ends of Grating and Edges of Cutouts in Grating
1) End Banding 14 inch less than height of grating with top of grating and top edge of banding flush
2) Cutout Banding Full-height of grating3) Use banding of same material as grating4) Panel Layout Enable installation and subsequent removal of grating around
protrusions or piping5) Openings 6 Inches and Larger Lay out grating panels with edges of
2 adjacent panels located on centerline of opening6) Openings smaller than 6 Inches Locate opening at edge of single panel7) Where an area requires more than 1 grating section to cover area clamp
adjacent grating sections together at 14-points with fasteners acceptable to ENGINEER
8) Fabricate grating in units of maximum 50 pounds each
e When requested by ENGINEER test 1 section of each size grating for each span length involved on the job under full load
1) Furnish a suitable dial gauge for measuring deflections
f Grating shall be galvanized steel unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 05500 ndash Page 7 of 10 41018 Metal FabricationsJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
2 Aluminum Grating
a Material for Gratings Shelf Angles and Rebates 6061-T6 or 6063-T6 aluminum alloy except cross bars may be 6063-T5 aluminum alloy
b Shelf Angle Concrete Anchors Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steelc Grating Rebate Rod Anchors 6061-T6 or 6063-T6 aluminum alloyd Bar Size and Spacing As determined by manufacturer to enable grating to support
design loade Design Live Load A minimum of 150 pounds per square foot uniform live load on
entire grating area but not less than the live load indicated on the Drawings for the area where grating is located
f Maximum Fiber Stress for Design Load 12000 pounds per square inchg Maximum Deflection Due to Design Load 1240 of grating clear spanh Maximum Spacing of Main Grating Bars 1-18 inches clear between barsi Minimum Grating Height 1-12 inchesj Manufacturers One of the following or equal
1) McNichols Company2) IKG Borden Industries3) Seidelhuber Metal Products Inc grooved I-Bar
3 Steel Gratings
a Hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123b Bar Size and Spacing Shall meet NAAMM of W-19-4 (1rdquox 316rdquo) and as
determined by the manufacturer to support design loadc Design Live Load A minimum of 150 pounds per square foot uniform live load on
the entire area of the grating area but not less than the live load indicated on the Drawings for the area where the grating is located
d Maximum Fiber Stress for Design Load 18000 pounds per square inche Maximum Deflection Under Design Load 1240 of grating clear spanf Bar Spacing Maximum of 1-18 inches clear between barsg Manufacturers One of the following or equal
1) McNichols Company2) IKG Borden Industries IKG Weldforged3) Seidelhuber Metal Products Inc Type 19W4
4 Heavy-Duty Steel Grating
a Heavy-duty type fabricated from structural steel and designed in accordance with AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges using HS-20 loading
b Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 123c Manufacturers One of the following or equal
1) McNichols Company2) IKG Borden Industries Heavy Duty Steel Grating3) Seidelhuber Metal Products Inc equivalent product
F Metal Tread Plate
1 Plate having a raised figured pattern on 1 surface to provide improved traction
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 05500 ndash Page 8 of 10 41018 Metal FabricationsJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
G Preformed Channel Pipe Supports
1 Preformed channel pipe supports for pipe supports and other applications are specified in Section 15066
H Stairs
1 Steel Stairs
a Ships ladders shall conform to local State and Occupational Safety and Health Administration Standards as minimum
b Design of Metal Stairs is specified in Section 05511c Stringers Structural steel channels or platesd Treads See 203A abovee Railings Aluminum per Section 05520f Anchors Welded or bolted brackets designed for support and anchorage at top and
bottomg Finish Hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123
I Miscellaneous Metal
1 Miscellaneous Aluminum Fabricate aluminum products not covered separately herein in accordance with the best practices of the trade and field assemble by riveting or bolting Do not weld or flame cut
2 Miscellaneous Cast Iron
a General
1) Tough gray iron free from cracks holes swells and cold shuts2) Quality such that hammer blow will produce indentation on rectangular edge
of casting without flaking metal3) Before leaving the foundry clean castings and apply 16-mil dry film
thickness coating of coal-tar epoxy unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings
3 Miscellaneous Stainless Steel
a Provide miscellaneous stainless steel items not specified herein as indicated on the Drawings or specified elsewhere Fabricate and install in accordance with the best practices of the trade
4 Miscellaneous Structural Steel
a Provide miscellaneous steel items not specified herein as indicated on the Drawings or specified elsewhere Fabricate and install in accordance with the best practices of the trade
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 05500 ndash Page 9 of 10 41018 Metal FabricationsJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
31 EXAMINATION
A Verification of Conditions Examine work in place to verify that it is satisfactory to receive the work of this Section If unsatisfactory conditions exist do not begin this work until such conditions have been corrected
32 INSTALLATION
A General Install products as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturers printed instructions as applicable except where specified otherwise
B Aluminum Stair Nosing
1 Install stair nosings on treads of concrete stairs including top tread on upper concrete slab
2 Omit stair nosings where concrete is submerged3 Coat aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete as specified in Section 099024 Cast stair nosings in fresh concrete flush with tread and riser faces Install nosing in
center of step approximately 3 inches from each stair edge
C Ladders
1 Secure to supporting surface with bent plate clips providing minimum 8 inches between supporting surface and center of rungs
2 Where exit from ladder is forward over top rung extend side rails 3 feet 3 inches minimum above landing and return the rails with a radius bend to the landing
3 Where exit from ladder is to side extend ladder 5 feet 6 inches minimum above landing and rigidly secure at top
4 Erect rail straight level plumb and true to position indicated on the Drawings Correct deviations from true line or grade which are visible to the eye
D Metal Gratings
1 General
a Allow 18-inch maximum clearance between ends of grating and inside face of vertical leg of shelf angles
b Horizontal bearing leg of shelf angles shall be 2 inches minimumc Install metal plate or angles where necessary to fill openings at changes in
elevation and at openings between equipment and gratingd Install angle stops at ends of gratinge Installed grating shall not slide out of rebate or off supportf Weld stops in place unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawingsg Top surfaces of grating sections adjacent to each other shall lie in same plane
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 05500 ndash Page 10 of 10 41018 Metal FabricationsJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3
2 Aluminum Grating
a Coat surfaces of aluminum shelf angles rebates and rod anchors in contact with concrete as specified in Section 09902
b Aluminum Grating Support on aluminum shelf angles or rebates
3 Steel Grating
a Support on hot-dip galvanized structural steel shelf angles or rebates
4 Heavy-Duty Steel Grating
a Support on hot-dip galvanized structural steel rebates embedded and anchored in concrete
b Use for roadways traffic areas and where indicated on the Drawings
E Stairs
1 General
a Install guard railings around stair wells as indicated on the Drawings or specified
33 - 310 (NOT USED)
311 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
No separate measurement and payment for work performed under this Section Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part
END OF SECTION
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 06100- Page 1 of 3 Rough Carpentry MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
101 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Condi-
tions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section
102 SUMMARY
A This Section includes the following
1 Wood furring grounds nailers and blocking
103 SUBMITTALS
A General Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Divi-
sion 1 Specification Sections
B Product Data for the following products
1 Metal framing anchors
2 Construction adhesives
A Retain below where applicable normally delete if species and grade are indicated for each use
B Material certificates for dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit
stresses Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the
American Lumber Standards Committees (ALSC) Board of Review
C Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results relative to compliance of fire-retardant-treated wood products with requirements indicat-
ed
D Insert specific model code organization below or revise if report must be from another source
E Research or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction that evidence the following products compliance with building code in effect for
Project
1 Metal framing anchors
2 Power-driven fasteners
3 Fire-retardant-treated wood
104 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A Keep materials under cover and dry Protect from weather and contact with damp or wet surfac-
es Stack lumber plywood and other panels Provide for air circulation within and around
stacks and under temporary coverings
1 For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals place spacers
between each bundle to provide air circulation
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
201 MANUFACTURERS
A Available Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following
1 Metal Framing Anchors
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 06100- Page 2 of 3 Rough Carpentry MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
a Cleveland Steel Specialty Co
b Harlen Metal Products Inc
c Silver Metal Products Inc
d Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc
e Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co Inc
202 LUMBER GENERAL
A Lumber Standards Comply with DOC PS 20 American Softwood Lumber Standard and
with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSCs Board of Review
B Grade Stamps Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection
agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency
grade species moisture content at time of surfacing and mill
C Where nominal sizes are indicated provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture
content specified Where actual sizes are indicated they are minimum dressed sizes for dry
lumber
1 Provide dressed lumber S4S unless otherwise indicated
2 Provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-
inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less unless otherwise indicated
203 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED LUMBER
A General Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated use materials complying with
requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire-
test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test
method indicated by a qualified testing agency
B Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process Products with a flame
spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84 and with no evidence of
significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes and with
the flame front not extending more than 105 feet (32 m) beyond the centerline of the burners
at any time during the test
1 Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners
2 Exterior Type Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for
fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected
to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898 Use for exterior locations
and where indicated
C Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent Do not use
matrial that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material
D Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board
of Review
E Application Treat all rough carpentry unless otherwise indicated specifically including
1 Wood cants nailers curbs equipment support bases blocking stripping and similar
members in connection with roofing flashing vapor barriers and waterproofing
204 FASTENERS
A General Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in
this Article for material and manufacture
1 All fasteners and hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel
B Nails Wire Brads and Staples FS FF-N-105
C Below covers power-driven staples nails P-nails and allied fasteners
D Power-Driven Fasteners CABO NER-272
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 06100- Page 3 of 3 Rough Carpentry MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
E Wood Screws ASME B1861
F Lag Bolts ASME B1821 (ASME B18238M)
G High-Strength Bolts Nuts amp Washers ASTM A325 (ASTM A325M) Type 1 heavy hex steel
structural bolts heavy hex carbon-steel nuts and hardened carbon-steel washers
205 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A General Provide galvanized steel hangers and framing anchors of structural capacity type and
size indicated and as recommended by the manufacturer for each use
B Galvanized Steel Sheet Hot-dip zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653 G60
(ASTM A 653M Z180) coating designation structural commercial or lock-forming quality
as standard with manufacturer for type of anchor indicated
PART 3 - EXECUTION
301 INSTALLATION GENERAL
A Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of carpentry and that are too small to
use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement
B Set carpentry to required levels and lines with members plumb true to line cut and fitted
C Fit carpentry to other construction scribe and cope as required for accurate fit Correlate loca-
tion of furring nailers blocking grounds and similar supports to allow attachment of other
construction
D Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber
and plywood
E Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated complying
with the following
1 NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners
2 Table 230491 Fastening Schedule in ICCs International Building Code
F Revise below to include other kinds of nails if required
G Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials
Make tight connections between members Install fasteners without splitting wood predrill as
required
H Use hot-dip galvanized or stainless-steel nails
302 WOOD FRAMING GENERAL
A Framing Standard Comply with UBC standards for structural framing unless otherwise indicat-
ed
B Install framing members of size and at spacing indicated
C Do not splice structural members between supports
303 PROTECTION
A Protect rough carpentry from weather
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
822018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 07130- Page 1 of 2 Under-Slab Vapor Barrier MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
SECTION 07130
UNDER-SLAB VAPOR BARRIER
PART 1 ndash GENERAL
11 SUMMARY
A Products supplied under this section
1 Vapor barrier and installation accessories for installation under concrete slabs
12 REFERENCES
A American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1 ASTM E1745-17 Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Con-
tact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs
2 ASTM E1643-11 Selection Design Installation and Inspection of Water Vapor Retard-
ers Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs
B Technical Reference - American Concrete Institute (ACI)
1 ACI 3022R-06 Guide for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture-Sensitive Flooring Materials
2 ACI 3021R-15 Guide to Concrete Floor and Slab Construction
13 SUBMITTALS
A Quality controlassurance
1 Summary of test results per paragraph 93 of ASTM E1745
2 Manufacturerrsquos samples and literature
3 Manufacturerrsquos installation instructions for placement seaming penetration prevention
and repair and perimeter seal per ASTM E1643
4 All mandatory ASTM E1745 testing must be performed on a single production roll per
ASTM E1745 Section 81
PART 2 ndash PRODUCTS
21 MATERIALS
A Vapor barrier shall have all of the following qualities
1 Maintain permeance of less than 001 Perms [grains(ft2 hr inHg)] as tested in accordance
with mandatory conditioning tests per ASTM E1745 Section 71 (711-715)
2 Other performance criteria
a Strength ASTM E1745 Class A
b Thickness 15 mils minimum
3 Provide third party documentation that all testing was performed on a single production roll
per ASTM E1745 Section 81
B Vapor barrier products
1 Acceptable products include but are not necessarily limited to
a Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier (15-mil) by Stego Industries LLC (877) 464-7834
wwwstegoindustriescom
22 ACCESSORIES
A Seams
822018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 07130- Page 2 of 2 Under-Slab Vapor Barrier MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
1 Seam tape explicitly identified as compatible with vapor barrier by barrier manufacturer and
installed in accordance with manufacturerrsquos written instructions
B Sealing Penetrations of Vapor barrier
1 Seam tape and mastic explicitly identified as compatible with vapor barrier by barrier manu-
facturer and installed in accordance with manufacturerrsquos written instructions
C Perimeteredge seal
1 Tack tape termination bars and other components explicitly identified as compatible with
vapor barrier by barrier manufacturer and installed in accordance with manufacturerrsquos written
instructions
D Accessories
1 Where special conditions require for example penetration prevention measures and screeds
for use with interior forms utilize accessories and components explicitly identified as compat-
ible with vapor barrier by barrier manufacturer and installed in accordance with manufactur-
errsquos written instructions
PART 3 ndash EXECUTION
31 PREPARATION
A Ensure that subsoil is approved by Architect or Geotechnical Engineer
1 Level and compact base material
32 INSTALLATION
A Install vapor barrier in accordance ASTM E1643
1 Unroll vapor barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the concrete
placement and face laps away from the expected direction of the placement whenever
possible
2 Extend vapor barrier to the perimeter of the slab If practicable terminate it at the top of
the slab otherwise (a) at a point acceptable to the structural engineer or (b) where ob-
structed by impediments such as dowels waterstops or any other site condition requir-
ing early termination of the vapor barrier At the point of termination seal vapor barrier
to the foundation wall grade beam or slab itself
3 Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturerrsquos seam tape
4 Apply seam tapeCrete Claw to a clean and dry vapor barrier
5 Seal all penetrations (including pipes) per manufacturerrsquos instructions
6 For interior forming applications avoid the use of non-permanent stakes driven through
vapor barrier Use blunt-end andor threaded nail stakes (screed pad posts) and insert
them into Beast Foot Ensure Beast Footrsquos peel-and-stick adhesive base is fully adhered
to the vapor barrier
7 If non-permanent stakes must be driven through vapor retarder repair as recommended
by vapor retarder manufacturer
8 Use reinforcing bar supports with base sections that eliminate or minimize the potential
for puncture of the vapor barrier
9 Repair damaged areas with vapor barrier material of similar (or better) permeance punc-
ture and tensile
10 For vapor barrier-safe concrete screeding applications install Beast Screed (vapor barri-
er-safe screed system) per manufacturerrsquos instructions prior to placing concrete
END OF SECTION
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 07210- Page 1 of 2 Building Insulation MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
SECTION 07210
BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
101 SECTION INCLUDES
A Rigid board type wall insulation(s) for thermal protection in wall assemblies
102 REFERENCES
A Refer to specific products for applicable standards and specifications of the following organiza-
tions agencies
1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
2 Federal Specifications (FS)
3 Factory Mutual (FM)
103 SUBMITTALS
A Comply with submittal procedures specified in Section 01330
B Product data Manufacturerrsquos specifications and installation instructions for polyiso foam core in-
sulation board and fasteners
C Samples
1 Submit 5 inch x 9 inch sample(s) of each board type required
2 Submit sample(s) of each fastener type required
D Certificates Manufacturerrsquos certification that materials meet specification requirements
104 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Regulatory Requirements
1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
2 Federal Specifications (FS)
3 Factory Mutual (FM)
105 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A Comply with general requirements specified in Section 01650
B Deliver insulation in packages labeled with material name thermal value and product code
C When stored outdoors stack insulation on pallets above ground and cover with tarpaulin or other
suitable waterproof coverings Slit or remove manufactureracutes packaging before covering with the
jobsite waterproof covering to prevent condensation accumulation
106 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A Comply with building code andor insurance underwriterrsquos requirements applicable for products of
this Section
B Do not install insulation when insulation and or framing is wet
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 07210- Page 2 of 2 Building Insulation MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
201 MANUFACTURER
A Provide foil-faced polyiso insulating sheathing products as manufactured by Atlas Roofing Corpo-
ration 2000 River Edge Parkway Ste 800 Atlanta GA 30328 Ph (770) 952-1442 Fax (770)
952-3170
202 MATERIALS
A Basis of Design
1 Closed-cell polyisocyanurate foam core manufactured using patented non-ozone deplet-
ing hydrocarbon blowing technology ASTM C1289 Type I Class 1
B Insulation Long-Term ldquoRrdquo Value Determined in accordance with CANULC-S770LTTR
203 FASTENERS
A Basis of Design
1 Secure all rigid wall insulation with thermal wing-nut anchors equal to Type 304 Stain-
less Steel Hohmann amp Barnard Thermal 2-Seal Adjustable Veneer Anchors
PART 3 - EXECUTION
301 EXAMINATION
A Start of installation indicates installer accepts conditions of existing framing surfaces
302 APPLICATION INSTALLATION
A Install specified wall insulation panels using approved mechanical fasteners in accordance with
manufacturerrsquos latest written instructions and building codes
B Install with tight board to board joints to assure proper edge contact and thermal performance
C Install approved peel and stick min 4rdquo wide tape at all junctures of the foam panels and at all
penetrations
303 CLEANING PROTECTION
A Remove trash and construction debris from insulation and or framing surfaces prior to applica-
tion
B Do not leave installed insulation exposed to weather for more than 60 days after installation
1 Remove and replace installed insulation that has become damaged with new insulation
2 Allow insulation surface to air dry prior to installing the wall cladding
END OF SECTION
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 07220- Page 1 of 3 Roof Insulation MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
SECTION 07220
ROOF INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
101 SECTION INCLUDES
A HCFC FREE Polyiso Rigid board type roof insulation(s) for thermal protection as part of roofing as-
semblies
102 RELATED SECTIONS
A Section 05 30 00 - Metal Decking
B Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry Roof blocking and nailers
103 REFERENCES
A ASTM C 1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Insulation Board
B ASTM E 108 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings
C ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
D FM 4450 - Approval Standard - Class I Insulated Steel Roof Decks
E FM 4470 - Approval Standard - Class I Roof Covers
F LTTR ndash Long Term Thermal Resistancepredicted by CANULC-S770-03
G UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
H UL 790 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings
I UL 1256 - Fire Test of Roof Deck Constructions
104 DEFINITIONS
A LTTR (Long Term Thermal Resistance) is defined as using techniques from ASTM C1303 or
CANULC-S770 the predicted R-Value that has been shown to be equivalent to the average performance
of a permeably faced foam insulation product over 15 years LTTR applies to ALL foam insulation prod-
ucts with blowing agents other than air such as polyiso extruded polystyrene and polyurethane The new
method is based on consensus standards in the US and Canada
105 SUBMITTALS
A Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00 and 01 60 00
B Product Data
1 Manufactureracutes specifications
2 Installation instructions for insulation board and fasteners
3 Product Data as per ASTM 2129 ndash 01 Standard for Data Collection for Sustainability Assess-
ment of Building Products
C Samples
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 07220- Page 2 of 3 Roof Insulation MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
1 Submit 6 by 6 inch (152 by 152 mm) samples of each board type required
2 Submit samples of each fastener type required
D Shop Drawings Roof plan showing layout of boards and fastening patterns
E Certificates System Manufactureracutes or insulation manufacturerrsquos certification that the insulation meets
Zero ODP (Ozone Depletion Potential) and Zero GWP (Global Warming Potential) specification require-
ments
F Thermal Warranty Submit sample warranty indicating conditions and limitations
106 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Regulatory Requirements
1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
2 Factory Mutual (FM)
3 Underwriters Laboratories Inc (UL) Classification
4 IBC BOCA ICBO and SBCCI Sections on Foam Plastic Insulation
107 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A Comply with general requirements specified in Section 01 65 00
B Deliver insulation in packages labeled with material name thermal value and product code
C When stored outdoors stack insulation on pallets above ground or roof deck and cover with tarpaulin or
other suitable waterproof coverings Slit or remove manufactureracutes packaging before covering with water-
proof covering
108 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A Comply with insurance underwriteracutes requirements applicable for products of this Section
B Do not install insulation on roof deck when water of any type is present Do not apply roofing materials
when substrate is damp or wet
PART 2 PRODUCTS
201 MANUFACTURERS
A Acceptable Manufacturers Atlas Roofing Corporation
B Provide polyiso roof board insulation from a single manufacturer
202 MATERIALS
A Polyiso Roof Board Insulation Provide products that comply with the following
1 ASTM standards specified
2 Underwriters Laboratories Inc (UL) classifications specified
3 ICBO Uniform Building Code Section on Foam Plastic Insulation
B Polyiso Roof Board Insulation Closed-cell HCFC FREE ldquoGreenrdquo polyisocyanurate foam core integrally
laminated to heavy non- asphaltic fiber-reinforced felt facers FM 1-90 wind uplift classification compres-
sive strength - 20 psi
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 07220- Page 3 of 3 Roof Insulation MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
C Nailable Polyiso Roof Board Insulation Closed-cell HCFC FREE ldquoGreenrdquo polyisocyanurate foam board
bonded to 716 inch thick APATECO rated OSB on the top side and a fiber-reinforced felt facer on the
bottom for use with metal roofing FM 1-90 wind rating compressive strength - 20 psi
D LTTR - Insulation R Value Long-term thermal resistance values of the foam were determined in ac-
cordance with CANULC-S770 All test samples were third-party selected and tested by an accredited ma-
terials testing laboratory
D Related Materials
1 Fasteners Factory Mutual approved
2 Fasteners For nailable insulation per insulation manufacturers standards
PART 3 ndash EXECUTION
301 EXAMINATION
A Examine roof deck for suitability to receive insulation Verify that substrate is dry clean and free of for-
eign material that will damage insulation or impede installation
B Verify that roof drains scuppers roof curbs nailers equipment supports vents and other roof accesso-
ries are secured properly and installed in conformance with Contract Drawings and submittals
C Verify that deck is structurally sound to support installers materials and equipment without damaging or
deforming work
1 Start of installation indicates installer accepts conditions of existing deck surfaces
302 APPLICATION INSTALLATION
A Install specified insulation using approved mechanical fasteners in accordance with manufactureracutes lat-
est written instructions and as required by governing codes and Owneracutes insurance carrier
B Install with end joints staggered to avoid having insulation joints coinciding with joints in deck In mul-
ti-layer installations stagger joints in top and bottom layers
303 CLEANING PROTECTION
A Remove trash and construction debris from insulation surface prior to application of roofing membrane
B Do not leave installed insulation exposed to weather Cover and waterproof with completed roof system
immediately after installation
1 Temporarily seal exposed insulation edges at the end of each day
2 Remove and replace installed insulation that has become wet or damaged with new insulation
C Protect installed insulation and roof cover from traffic by use of protective covering materials during and
after installation
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 07411- Page 1 of 10 Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
SECTION 07411
STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
11 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section
12 SUMMARY
A Section includes standing-seam metal roof panels
13 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A Preinstallation Conference Conduct conference at Project site
1 Meet with Owner Architect Owners insurer if applicable metal panel Installer metal panel
manufacturers representative structural-support Installer and installers whose work interfaces
with or affects metal panels including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment
2 Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials Installers
personnel equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays
3 Review methods and procedures related to metal panel installation including manufacturers
written instructions
4 Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements including alignment between and
attachment to structural members
5 Review structural loading limitations of deck during and after roofing
6 Review flashings special details drainage penetrations equipment curbs and condition of other
construction that affect metal panels
7 Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance certificates and tests and
inspections if applicable
8 Review temporary protection requirements for metal panel systems during and after installation
9 Review procedures for repair of metal panels damaged after installation
10 Document proceedings including corrective measures and actions required and furnish copy of
record to each participant
14 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A Product Data For each type of product
1 Include construction details material descriptions dimensions of individual components and
profiles and finishes for each type of panel and accessory
B Sustainable Design Submittals
1 Product Test Reports For roof materials documentation indicating that roof materials comply
with Solar Reflectance Index requirements
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 07411- Page 2 of 10 Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
2 Product Data For recycled content indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content
and cost
C Shop Drawings
1 Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels details of edge conditions joints
panel profiles corners anchorages attachment system trim flashings closures and accessories
and special details
2 Accessories Include details of the flashing trim and anchorage systems at a scale of not less than
3 inches per 12 inches (15)
D Calculations
1 Include calculations with registered engineer seal verifying roof panel and attachment method
resist wind pressures imposed on it pursuant to applicable building codes
E Samples for Initial Selection For each type of metal panel indicated with factory-applied color finishes
1 Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection
F Samples for Verification For each type of exposed finish required prepared on Samples of size indicated
below
1 Metal Panels 12 inches (305 mm) long by actual panel width Include clips fasteners closures
and other metal panel accessories
15 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A Qualification Data For Manufacturer and Installer
B Product Test Reports For each product for tests performed by a qualified testing agency
C Field quality-control reports
D Sample Warranties For special warranties
16 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A Maintenance Data For metal panels to include in maintenance manuals
17 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Manufacturer Qualifications Company specializing in architectural sheet metal products
B Installer Qualifications An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved
by manufacturer
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 07411- Page 3 of 10 Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
18 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A Deliver components metal panels and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed
Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling
B Unload store and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending warping twisting and surface
damage
C Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated
covering Store metal panels to ensure dryness with positive slope for drainage of water Do not store
metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining denting or other surface damage
D Retain strippable protective covering on metal panels until installation Remove as panels are being
installed Verify film is not left on installed panels
19 FIELD CONDITIONS
A Weather Limitations Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions
permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers written instructions and
warranty requirements
110 COORDINATION
A Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs equipment supports and roof penetrations with actual
equipment provided
B Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work flashing trim construction of soffits and
other adjoining work to provide a leakproof secure and noncorrosive installation
111 WARRANTY
A Special Galvalume Substrate Warranty Manufacturers standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period
1 Failures include but are not limited to the following
a Structural failures including rupturing or perforating
b Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering
2 Warranty Period 20 years and 6 months from date of Substantial Completion
B Special Installer Warranty Furnish a written warranty signed by the Panel Applicator guaranteeing
materials and workmanship for watertightness of the roofing system flashings penetrations and
against all leaks
1 Warranty Period Two years from date of Substantial Completion
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 07411- Page 4 of 10 Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
21 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A Recycled Content Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less
than 29 percent
B Energy Performance Provide roof panels according to one of the following when tested according to
CRRC-1
1 Three-year aged solar reflectance of not less than 035
2 Three-year aged Solar Reflectance Index of not less than 29 when calculated according to
ASTM E 1980
C Air Infiltration Air leakage of not more than 006 cfmsq ft (03 Ls per sq m) when tested according to
ASTM E 1680 and ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference
1 Test-Pressure Difference 624 lbfsq ft (300 Pa)
D Water Penetration under Static Pressure No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646
and ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference
1 Test-Pressure Difference 15 lbfsq ft (7182 Pa)
E Hydrostatic Head Resistance No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E2140
F Wind-Uplift Resistance Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift-
resistance class indicated
1 Uplift Rating UL 90
G Thermal Movements Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by
preventing buckling opening of joints overstressing of components failure of joint sealants failure of
connections and other detrimental effects Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due
to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss
22 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS
A General Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping and
interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and mechanically
attaching panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps Include clips cleats pressure plates and
accessories required for weathertight installation
1 Steel Panel Systems Unless more stringent requirements are indicated comply with
ASTM E 1514
2 Aluminum Panel Systems Unless more stringent requirements are indicated comply with
ASTM E 1637
B Vertical-Rib Seamed-Joint Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels Formed with vertical ribs at panel edges
and panel striations between ribs designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels
to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels engaging opposite edge of adjacent
panels and mechanically seaming panels together
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 07411- Page 5 of 10 Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
1 Basis-of-Design Products include but are not limited to Berridge Manufacturing Company Zee-
lock (90o seam)
2 Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 792A 792M Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) coating designation structural quality
Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755A 755M
a Nominal Thickness 0024 inch (061 mm)
b Exterior Finish Galvalume
c Painted materials shall have a removable plastic film to protect the paint during roll
forming shipping and handling
3 Clips Continuous Zee-rib with Vinyl Weatherseal insert to accommodate thermal movement
a All clips hardware and fasteners utilized for this installation shall be non-ferrous
(aluminum or Type 316 stainless steel) to the extent practicable
4 Joint Type Single folded
5 Panel Coverage 16 inches (406 mm)
6 Panel Height 20 inches (51 mm)
23 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A Self-Adhering High-Temperature Underlayment Provide self-adhering cold-applied sheet
underlayment a minimum of 40 mils (102 mm) thick consisting of slip-resistant polyethylene-film
top surface laminated to a layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive with release-paper backing
Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer
1 Thermal Stability Stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C) ASTM D 1970
2 Low-Temperature Flexibility Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29 deg C) ASTM D 1970
3 Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the
following
a Mid-States Asphalt Quick Stick HT Pro
b Polyglass Polystick MTS
c Soprema Lastobond Shield HT
d Tamko TW Underlayment or TW Metal amp Tile Underlayment
B Felt Underlayment ASTM D 226D 22M Type II (No 30) asphalt-saturated organic felts
24 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring ASTM C 645 cold-formed metallic-coated steel sheet
ASTM A 653A 653M G90 (Z275 hot-dip galvanized) coating designation or ASTM A 792A 792M
Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) coating designation unless otherwise indicated Provide manufacturers
standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system
B Panel Accessories Provide components required for a complete weathertight panel system including
trim copings fasciae mullions sills corner units clips flashings sealants gaskets fillers closure
strips and similar items Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 07411- Page 6 of 10 Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
1 Closures Provide closures at eaves and ridges fabricated of same metal as metal panels
2 Backing Plates Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices fabricated from material
recommended by manufacturer
C Flashing and Trim Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as required to
seal against weather and to provide finished appearance Locations include but are not limited to
eaves rakes corners bases framed openings ridges fasciae and fillers Finish flashing and trim with
same finish system as adjacent metal panels
D Gutters Formed from same material as roof panels complete with end pieces outlet tubes and other
special pieces as required Fabricate in minimum 96-inch (2400-mm) long sections of size and metal
thickness according to SMACNAs Architectural Sheet Metal Manual Furnish gutter supports spaced
a maximum of 36 inches (914 mm) oc fabricated from same metal as gutters Provide wire ball
strainers of compatible metal at outlets Finish gutters to match metal roof panels All clips hardware
and fasteners utilized for gutter installations shall be non-ferrous (aluminum or Type 316 stainless steel)
to the extent practicable
E Downspouts Formed from same material as roof panels Fabricate in 10-foot (3-m) long sections
complete with formed elbows and offsets of size and metal thickness according to SMACNAs
Architectural Sheet Metal Manual Finish downspouts to match gutters All clips hardware and
fasteners utilized for downspout installations shall be non-ferrous (aluminum or Type 316 stainless
steel) to the extent practicable
F Panel Fasteners Type 316 stainless steel (preferred) zinc-coated steel corrosion resisting steel zinc cast
head or nylon capped steel type and size as approved for the applicable loading requirements
G Panel Sealants Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with panel
materials are nonstaining and do not damage panel finish
1 Joint Sealant Silicone sealant of type grade class and use classifications required to seal joints
in metal panels and remain weathertight and as recommended in writing by metal panel
manufacturer
25 FABRICATION
A General Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory by manufacturers standard
procedures and processes as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by
laboratory testing Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements
B On-Site Fabrication Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section metal panels may be
fabricated on-site using factory set non-adjustable portable roll-forming equipment if panels are of
same profile and warranted by manufacturer to be equal to factory-formed panels Fabricate according
to equipment manufacturers written instructions and to comply with details shown
C Provide panel profile including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs if any for full length of panel
D Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturers
recommendations and recommendations in SMACNAs Architectural Sheet Metal Manual that apply
to design dimensions metal and other characteristics of item indicated
1 Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning buckling and tool
marks and that are true to line and levels indicated with exposed edges folded back to form hems
2 Sealed Joints Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate sealant and to
comply with SMACNA standards
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 07411- Page 7 of 10 Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
3 Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from
compatible noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer
a Size As recommended by SMACNAs Architectural Sheet Metal Manual or metal panel
manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured
26 FINISHES
A Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable
temporary protective covering before shipping
B Appearance of Finished Work Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if
they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples Noticeable variations in same piece are
unacceptable Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range
of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast
C Steel Panels and Accessories
1 Two-Coat Fluoropolymer AAMA 621 Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent
PVDF resin by weight in color coat applied by panel manufacturer on a continuous coil coating
line with a top side dry film thickness of 075plusmn 005 mil (00013 mm) over 02plusmn 005 mil (00013
mm) primer coat to provide a total dry film thickness of 095plusmn 010 mil (0024 mm) Prepare
pretreat and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin
manufacturers written instructions
2 Mica Fluoropolymer AAMA 621 Two-coat fluoropolymer finish with suspended mica flakes
containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat applied by panel
manufacturer on a continuous coil coating line with a top side dry film thickness of 075plusmn 005
mil (00013 mm) over 02plusmn 005 mil (00013 mm) primer coat to provide a total dry film thickness
of 095plusmn 010 mil (0024 mm) Prepare pretreat and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to
comply with coating and resin manufacturers written instructions
3 Metallic Fluoropolymer AAMA 621 Two-coat fluoropolymer finish with suspended metallic
flakes containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear
topcoat applied by panel manufacturer on a continuous coil coating line with a top side dry film
thickness of 075plusmn 005 mil (00013 mm) over 02plusmn 005 mil (00013 mm) primer coat to provide
a total dry film thickness of 095plusmn 010 mil (0024 mm) Prepare pretreat and apply coating to
exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers written instructions
4 Concealed Finish Apply pretreatment and manufacturers standard white or light-colored acrylic
or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film
thickness of 035 mil (0009 mm)
D Aluminum Panels and Accessories
1 Two-Coat Fluoropolymer AAMA 2605 Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent
PVDF resin by weight in color coat applied by panel manufacturer on a continuous coil coating
line with a top side dry film thickness of 075plusmn 005 mil (00013 mm) over 02plusmn 005 mil (00013
mm) primer coat to provide a total dry film thickness of 095plusmn 010 mil (0024 mm) Prepare
pretreat and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin
manufacturers written instructions
2 Mica Fluoropolymer AAMA 2605 Two-coat fluoropolymer finish with suspended mica flakes
containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat applied by panel
manufacturer on a continuous coil coating line with a top side dry film thickness of 075plusmn 005
mil (00013 mm) over 02plusmn 005 mil (00013 mm) primer coat to provide a total dry film thickness
of 095plusmn 010 mil (0024 mm) Prepare pretreat and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to
comply with coating and resin manufacturers written instructions
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 07411- Page 8 of 10 Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
3 Metallic Fluoropolymer AAMA 2605 Two-coat fluoropolymer finish with suspended metallic
flakes containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear
topcoat applied by panel manufacturer on a continuous coil coating line with a top side dry film
thickness of 075plusmn 005 mil (00013 mm) over 02plusmn 005 mil (00013 mm) primer coat to provide
a total dry film thickness of 095plusmn 010 mil (0024 mm) Prepare pretreat and apply coating to
exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers written instructions
PART 3 - EXECUTION
31 EXAMINATION
A Examine substrates areas and conditions with Installer present for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances metal panel supports and other conditions affecting performance of the Work
1 Examine primary and secondary roof framing to verify that rafters purlins angles channels and
other structural panel support members and anchorages have been installed within alignment
tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer
2 Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking
and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer
a Verify that air- or water-resistive barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing
substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration
B Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual locations of
penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before installation
C Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
32 PREPARATION
A Miscellaneous Supports Install subframing furring and other miscellaneous panel support members and
anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturers written recommendations
33 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment Apply primer if required by manufacturer Comply with temperature
restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation Apply at locations indicated below wrinkle
free in shingle fashion to shed water and with end laps of not less than 6 inches (152 mm) staggered
24 inches (610 mm) between courses Overlap side edges not less than 36 inches (9144 mm Roll laps
with roller Cover underlayment within 14 days or as directed by the underlayment product
manufacturer
1 Apply over the entire roof surface
B Flashings Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in
Section 076200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 07411- Page 9 of 10 Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
34 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A General Install metal panels according to manufacturers written instructions in orientation sizes and
locations indicated Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise indicated Anchor metal
panels and other components of the Work securely in place with provisions for thermal and structural
movement
1 Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal panels to be level to 14 inch in 20 ft (6 mm
in 61 m)
2 Flash and seal metal panels at perimeter of all openings Do not begin installation until air- or
water-resistive barriers and flashings that will be concealed by metal panels are installed
3 Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment
4 Install flashing and trim as metal panel work proceeds
5 Panels should be continuous without end laps
6 Align bottoms of metal panels and fasten
7 Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit-penetrating panels
B Fasteners
1 Steel Panels Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior use galvanized-steel
fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior
2 Aluminum Panels Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior use stainless-
steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior
C Anchor Clips Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work securely in place using
manufacturers approved fasteners according to manufacturers written instructions
D Metal Protection Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates protect against
galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer
E Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panel Installation Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips
at each standing-seam joint at location spacing and with fasteners recommended in writing by
manufacturer
1 Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners
2 Install pressure plates if required at locations indicated in manufacturers written installation
instructions
3 Seamed Joint Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved motorized seamer tool so clip
metal roof panel and factory-applied vinyl weatherseal are completely engaged
F Accessory Installation Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting
and provide for thermal expansion Coordinate installation with flashings and other components
1 Install components required for a complete metal panel system including trim copings corners
seam covers flashings sealants gaskets fillers and similar items Provide types indicated by
metal roof panel manufacturers or if not indicated types recommended by metal roof panel
manufacturer
G Flashing and Trim Comply with performance requirements manufacturers written installation
instructions and SMACNAs Architectural Sheet Metal Manual Provide concealed fasteners where
possible and set units true to line and level as indicated Install work with laps joints and seams that
will be permanently watertight and weather resistant
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 07411- Page 10 of 10 Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
1 Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks and that is true to line
and levels indicated with exposed edges folded back to form hems Install sheet metal flashing
and trim to fit substrates and achieve waterproof and weather-resistant performance
2 Expansion Provisions Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim
H Gutters Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped and sealed joints Attach gutters to eave with
gutter hangers spaced not more than 36 inches (914 mm) oc using manufacturers standard fasteners
Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant Provide for thermal expansion
I Downspouts Join sections with telescoping joints Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts
securely 1 inch (25 mm) away from walls locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60
inches (1524 mm) oc in between
1 Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building
2 Connect downspouts to underground drainage system indicated
J Roof Curbs Install flashing around bases where they meet metal roof panels
K Pipe Flashing Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels Fasten and seal to metal roof
panels as recommended by manufacturer
35 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A Installation Tolerances Shim and align metal panel units within installed tolerance of 14 inch in 20 feet
(6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines as indicated and within 18-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining
faces and of alignment of matching profiles
36 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A Manufacturers Field Service Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect metal
roof panel installation including accessories Report results in writing
B Remove and replace applications of metal roof panels where tests and inspections indicate that they do
not comply with specified requirements
C Additional tests and inspections at Contractors expense are performed to determine compliance of
replaced or additional work with specified requirements
37 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films if any as metal panels are installed unless
otherwise indicated in manufacturers written installation instructions On completion of metal panel
installation clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer Maintain in a clean
condition during construction
B Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish
touchup or similar minor repair procedures
END OF SECTION
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 07620- Page 1 of 5 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
SECTION 07620
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
101 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section
102 SUMMARY
A This Section includes sheet metal flashing and trim in the following categories
1 Roof-drainage systems
2 Metal flashing
B Related Sections The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section
1 Division 4 Sections for through-wall flashing and other integral masonry flashings specified as
part of masonry work
2 Division 7 Section Joint Sealants for elastomeric sealants
103 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A General Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads structural movement thermally in-
duced movement and exposure to weather without failing
B Fabricate and install flashings at roof edges to comply with recommendations of FM Loss Prevention Da-
ta Sheet 1-49 for the following wind zone
1 Wind Zone 1 Wind pressures of 21 to 30 psf (100 to 144 kPa)
104 SUBMITTALS
A General Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections
B Product Data including manufacturers material and finish data installation instructions and general rec-
ommendations for each specified flashing material and fabricated product
105 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Installer Qualifications Engage an experience Installer who has completed sheet metal flashing and trim
work similar in material design and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of success-
ful in-service performance
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 07620- Page 2 of 5 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
106 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A Coordinate Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining Work for proper sequencing of each in-
stallation Ensure best possible weather resistance durability of Work and protection of materials and
finishes
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
201 METALS
A Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet ASTM A 653A 653M G90 coating designation structural quali-
ty
202 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES
A Fasteners All fasteners and hardware shall be non-ferrous to the maximum extent feasible ideally 316
stainless steel At a minimum fasteners and hardware shall be same metal as sheet metal flashing or other
noncorrosive metal as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer Match finish of exposed heads with
material being fastened
B Asphalt Mastic SSPC-Paint 12 solvent-type asphalt mastic nominally free of sulfur and containing no
asbestos fibers compounded for 15-mil (04-mm) dry film thickness per coat
C Mastic Sealant Polyisobutylene nonhardening nonskinning nondrying nonmigrating sealant
D Elastomeric Sealant Generic type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and fabricator of compo-
nents being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section
Joint Sealants
E Adhesives Type recommended by flashing sheet metal manufacturer for waterproof and weather-
resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet metal
F Paper Slip Sheet 5-lbsquare (0244 kgsq m) red rosin sized building paper conforming to FS UU-B-
790 Type I Style 1b
G Metal Accessories Provide sheet metal clips straps anchoring devices and similar accessory units as re-
quired for installation of Work matching or compatible with material being installed noncorrosive size
and thickness required for performance
H Roofing Cement ASTM D 4586 Type I asbestos free asphalt based
203 FABRICATION GENERAL
A Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommenda-
tions of SMACNAs Architectural Sheet Metal Manual that apply to the design dimensions metal and
other characteristics of the item indicated
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 07620- Page 3 of 5 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
B Comply with details shown to fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that fit substrates and result in wa-
terproof and weather-resistant performance once installed Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be
covered before fabricating sheet metal
C Form exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning buckling and tool marks and that
is true to line and levels indicated with exposed edges folded back to form hems
D Seams Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams Tin edges to be seamed form
seams and solder
E Sealed Joints Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to
comply with SMACNA standards
F Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at loca-
tions of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer
G Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces
of sheet metal exposed to public view
H Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being anchored or
from compatible noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer
1 Size As recommended by SMACNA manual or sheet metal manufacturer for application but nev-
er less than thickness of metal being secured
204 SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A General Fabricate sheet metal items in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance require-
ments but not less than that listed below for each application and metal
B Gutters with Girth up to 15 Inches (380 mm) Fabricate from the following material
1 Galvanized Steel 00217 inch (055 mm) thick
C Downspouts Fabricate from the following material
1 Galvanized Steel 00217 inch (055 mm) thick
D Flashing (not otherwise specified) Exposed Trim Roof Penetration Flashing Fabricate from the follow-
ing material
1 Galvanized Steel 00276 inch (07 mm) thick
E Flashing Receivers Drip Edges Eave Flashing Fabricate from the following material
1 Galvanized Steel 00217 inch (055 mm) thick
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 07620- Page 4 of 5 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
PART 3 - EXECUTION
301 EXAMINATION
A Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be installed and veri-
fy that Work may properly commence Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected
302 INSTALLATION
A General Unless otherwise indicated install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance re-
quirements manufacturers installation instructions and SMACNAs Architectural Sheet Metal Manual
Anchor units of Work securely in place by methods indicated providing for thermal expansion of metal
units conceal fasteners where possible and set units true to line and level as indicated Install Work with
laps joints and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof
B Install exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning buckling and tool marks and that
is true to line and levels indicated with exposed edges folded back to form hems Install sheet metal
flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance Verify
shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal
C Expansion Provisions Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal Work Space movement
joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (610 mm) of corner or inter-
section Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be suf-
ficiently weatherproof and waterproof form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges not less
than 1 inch (25 mm) deep filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints)
D Soldered Joints Clean surfaces to be soldered removing oils and foreign matter Pretin edges of sheets to
be soldered to a width of 1-12 inches (38 mm) except where pretinned surface would show in finished
Work
1 Do not use torches for soldering Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint Fill
joint completely Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces
E Sealed Joints Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to
comply with SMACNA standards Fill joint with sealant and form metal to completely conceal sealant
1 Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered
F Seams Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams Tin edges to be seamed form
seams and solder
G Separations Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed sur-
faces at locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by
manufacturer
H Roof-Drainage Accessories Install drainage items fabricated from sheet metal with straps adhesives
and anchors recommended by SMACNAs Manual or the item manufacturer to drain roof in the most ef-
ficient manner Coordinate flashing and sheet metal items for steep-sloped roofs with roofing installation
I Roof-Penetration Flashing Coordinate roof-penetration flashing installation with roofing and installation
of items penetrating roof Install flashing as follows
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 07620- Page 5 of 5 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
1 Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping being careful not to block vent piping with flashing
2 Seal and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof other than lead flashing on vent piping
303 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A Clean exposed metal surfaces removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration
of finishes
B Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure sheet metal flashing and trim Work during
construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time of Substantial
Completion
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 07920- Page 1 of 6 Joint Sealants MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
SECTION 07920
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
101 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section
102 SUMMARY
A This Section includes sealants for the following applications including those specified by reference to
this Section
1 Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces
a Control and expansion joints
b Joints between different materials
c Perimeter joints at frames of doors and windows
d Other joints as indicated
2 Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces
a Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows
b Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls floors and counters
c Other joints as indicated
103 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals
without staining or deteriorating joint substrates
104 SUBMITTALS
A Product Data For each joint-sealant product indicated provide data indicating sealant chemical charac-
teristics performance criteria and limitations
B Samples for Initial Selection Manufacturers color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing
the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view
105 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Source Limitations Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 07920- Page 2 of 6 Joint Sealants MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
106 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manu-
facturer product name and designation color expiration date pot life curing time and mixing instruc-
tions for multicomponent materials
B Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturers written instructions to prevent their deterio-
ration or damage due to moisture high or low temperatures contaminants or other causes
107 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A Environmental Limitations Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following condi-
tions
1 When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant
manufacturer
2 When joint substrates are wet
B Joint-Width Conditions Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than
those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated
C Joint-Substrate Conditions Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable
of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
201 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS
A Available Products Subject to compliance with requirements products that may be incorporated into the
Work include but are not limited to the products specified in the sealant schedules at the end of Part 3
202 MATERIALS GENERAL
A Compatibility Provide joint sealants backings and other related materials that are compatible with one
another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by sealant
manufacturer based on testing and field experience
B Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range for this charac-
teristic
203 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A Elastomeric Sealant Standard Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liq-
uid-applied chemically curing sealant in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3 in-
cluding those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type grade class and uses
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 07920- Page 3 of 6 Joint Sealants MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
B Stain-Test-Response Characteristics Where elastomeric sealants are specified in the Elastomeric Joint-
Sealant Schedule to be nonstaining to porous substrates provide products that have undergone testing ac-
cording to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project
204 SOLVENT-RELEASE JOINT SEALANTS
A Butyl-Rubber-Based Solvent-Release Joint-Sealant Standard Comply with ASTM C 1085 for each prod-
uct of this description indicated in the Solvent-Release Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3
205 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A Latex Sealant Standard Comply with ASTM C 834 for each product of this description indicated in the
Latex Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3
206 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A General Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining are compatible with joint
substrates sealants primers and other joint fillers and are approved for applications indicated by sealant
manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing
B Cylindrical Sealant Backings ASTM C 1330 of type indicated below and of size and density to control
sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance
1 Type C Closed-cell material with a surface skin
C Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings Neoprene butyl EPDM or silicone tubing complying with
ASTM D 1056 nonabsorbent to water and gas and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down
to minus 26 deg F (minus 32 deg C)Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to
provide a secondary seal to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant perfor-
mance
D Bond-Breaker Tape Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for
preventing sealant from adhering to rigid inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint
where such adhesion would result in sealant failure Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable
207 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A Primer Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to
joint substrates indicated as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests
B Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant
backing materials free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates
and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants
with joint substrates
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 07920- Page 4 of 6 Joint Sealants MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
PART 3 - EXECUTION
301 EXAMINATION
A Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants with Installer present for compliance with require-
ments for joint configuration installation tolerances and other conditions affecting joint-sealant perfor-
mance
B Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
302 PREPARATION
A Surface Cleaning of Joints Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with
joint sealant manufacturers written instructions and the following requirements
1 Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint seal-
ant including dust paints (except for permanent protective coatings tested and approved for seal-
ant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer) old joint sealants oil grease waterproof-
ing water repellents water surface dirt and frost
2 Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing grinding blast cleaning mechanical abrading
or a combination of these methods to produce a clean sound substrate capable of developing op-
timum bond with joint sealants Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations
by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air Porous joint surfaces include the
following
a Concrete
b Masonry
3 Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete
4 Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain harm substrates
or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants
B Joint Priming Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer based
on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience Apply primer to comply with joint
sealant manufacturers written instructions Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond do not allow
spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces
C Masking Tape Use nonstaining masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining
surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods
required to remove sealant smears Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal
303 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A General Comply with joint sealant manufacturers written installation instructions for products and appli-
cations indicated unless more stringent requirements apply
B Sealant Installation Standard Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants
as applicable to materials applications and conditions indicated
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 07920- Page 5 of 6 Joint Sealants MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
C Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to
produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability
1 Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings
2 Do not stretch twist puncture or tear sealant backings
3 Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace
them with dry materials
D Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and back
of joints
E Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are in-
stalled
1 Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates
2 Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration
3 Produce uniform cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability
F Tooling of Nonsag Sealants Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins
tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth uniform beads of configuration
indicated to eliminate air pockets and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint
1 Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint
2 Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor
sealants or adjacent surfaces
3 Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated
a Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints
304 CLEANING
A Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints
occur
305 PROTECTION
A Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from
damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or
damage at time of Substantial Completion If despite such protection damage or deterioration occurs cut
out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas
are indistinguishable from the original work
306 ELASTOMERIC JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A Multicomponent Nonsag Urethane Sealant Where joint sealants of this type are indicated provide prod-
ucts complying with the following
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 07920- Page 6 of 6 Joint Sealants MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
1 Products Available products include the following
a Chem-Calk 500 Bostik Inc
b Dynatrol Pecora Corporation
c Sikaflex - 2c NS Sika Corporation
d Sonolastic NP 2 Sonneborn Building Products Div ChemRex Inc
2 Type and Grade M (multicomponent) and NS (nonsag)
3 Class 25
4 Use Related to Exposure NT (nontraffic)
5 Uses Related to Joint Substrates M G A and as applicable to joint substrates indicated O
6 Applications Door perimeters expansion and control joints in concrete and masonry
307 SOLVENT-RELEASE JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A Butyl-Rubber-Based Solvent-Release Sealant Where joint sealants of this type are indicated provide
products complying with the following
1 Products Available products include the following
a BC-158 Pecora Corporation
b Sonneborn Multi-Purpose Sealant Sonneborn Building Products Div ChemRex Inc
c Tremco Butyl Sealant Tremco
2 Applications General sealing between similar or dissimilar materials including masonry steel
aluminum glass wood and stone
B Latex Sealant Where joint sealants of this type are indicated provide products complying with the fol-
lowing
1 Products Available products include the following
a AC-20 Pecora Corporation
b Sonolac Sonneborn Building Products Div ChemRex Inc
c Tremco Acrylic Latex Caulk Tremco
2 Applications General purpose caulking including metal siding and plumbing fixtures
END OF SECTION
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 08111- Page 1 of 6 Aluminum Doors and Frames MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
SECTION 08111
ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 ndash GENERAL
11 Section Includes
A Aluminum Flush Doors
B Aluminum Door Frames
12 Related Sections
A Section 04810 ndash CMU (frame installation)
B Section 07920 ndash Sealant
C Section 08711 ndash Finish Hardware
13 References
A Aluminum Association Inc (AA)
1 AA 5005-H14 ndash Sheet Architectural
2 AA 6061-T6 ndash Heavy Duty Structures
3 AA 6063-T5 ndash Extrusions Pipe Architectural
4 AA DAF-45 ndash Designation System for Aluminum Finishes
B American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA)
1 AAMA 2603-98 ndash Pigmented Organic Coatings (Polycron)
2 AAMA 2605-98 ndash Superior Performing Organic Coatings (Kynar)
3 AAMA 609 ndash Anodized Architectural Finishes Cleaning and Maintenance
4 AAMA 610-02 ndash Painted Architectural Products Cleaning and Maintenance
5 AAMA 611-98 ndash Anodized Architectural Standards
6 AAMA 701 ndash Pile Weather Strip
C American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
1 A 123 ndash Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings
2 C 728-97 ndash Insulation Board Mineral Aggregate
3 E 330-97el ndash Structural Performance of Exterior Doors
14 Testing and Performance Requirements
A Structural Test Unit Minimum size of 3-feet (9144 cm) by 7-feet (21336 cm) with
24-inch (6096 cm) by 34-inch (8636 cm) vision light shall be evaluated compliant with ASTM E 330 testing
method
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 08111- Page 2 of 6 Aluminum Doors and Frames MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
B Test Procedures and Performances
1 With door closed and locked test unit in accordance with ASTM E 330 at static air pressure difference
of 900 pounds per square foot (383 kPa) positive pressure and 900 pounds per square foot negative pres-
sure with 155 miles (2495 km) per hour
wind load
2 At conclusion of test there shall be no glass breakage permanent damage to fasteners hardware
parts support arms or actuating mechanism nor any other damage that would cause the door to be inopera-
ble
15 Submittals
A Submit under provisions of Section 01300
B Product Data Manufacturerrsquos descriptive literature for each type door and frame include the following
information
1 Fabrication methods
2 Finishing
3 Hardware preparation
4 Accessories
C Shop Drawings Indicate the following
1 Elevations and details of each door and frame type
2 Schedule of doors and frames
3 Conditions at openings with various wall thicknesses and materials
4 Location and installation requirements for hardware
5 Thicknesses of materials joints
6 Connections and trim
D Samples Two sets of color chips representing specified colors and finishes
E Verification Samples
1 Submit samples of each type consisting of aluminum door corner construction minimum 6-inch by 6-
inch (150 mm) legs
2 Where color or texture variations are anticipated such as anodized finishes include two or more units in
each set of samples indicating extreme limits of variations
F Hardware Templates Provide finish hardware mounting details
G Manufacturerrsquos Installation Instructions Printed installation instructions for each product including product
storage requirements
H Operations and Maintenance Data Printed instructions for each product
16 Quality Assurance
A Manufacturer Qualifications Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum door and frame systems of
the type required for this project with minimum ten continuous years documented experience
B Product Qualifications Wind-load test certification conforming to ASTM E 330 on samples of previous
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 08111- Page 3 of 6 Aluminum Doors and Frames MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
products shall be provided for the type of door to be used
C Installerrsquos Qualifications Workmen skilled in handling aluminum door and frame systems of the type re-
quired for this project
D Instruction The manufacturer or his representative will be available for consultation to all parties engaged
in the project including instruction to installation personnel
17 Delivery Storage and Handling
A Deliver doors and frames palleted wrapped or individually crated Doors shall be side protected with sur-
rounding grooved 2-inch (508 mm) by 4-inch (1016 mm) wood frame and covered with 275-pound (12474
kg) test corrugated cardboard
B Inspect delivered doors and frames for damage unload and store with minimum handling Repair minor
damage if refinished items are equal in all respects to new work otherwise remove damaged items and replace
with new
C Store products of this section under cover in manufacturerrsquos unopened packaging until installation
1 Place units on minimum 4-inch (1016 mm) wood blocking
2 Avoid non-vented plastic or canvas covers
3 Remove packaging immediately if packaging becomes wet
4 Provide 025-inch (635 mm) air spaces between stacked doors
18 Project Conditions
A Field Measurements Take field measurements of areas to receive aluminum frames note discrepancies on
submitted shop drawings
19 Scheduling
A Ensure that all approvals andor shop drawings are supplied or returned to the manufacturer in time for fab-
rication without affecting construction progress schedule
B Ensure that templates andor actual hardware requested by manufacturer are available in time for fabrication
without affecting construction progress schedule
110 Warranty
A Manufacturer Ten year warranty against defects in workmanship and materials including warping rotting
decaying or bowing
B Installer Warrant installation procedures and performance for five years against defects due to workman-
ship and materials handling
PART 2 ndash PRODUCTS
21 Manufacturers
A Acceptable Manufacturers include the following and approved equals
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 08111- Page 4 of 6 Aluminum Doors and Frames MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
Cline Aluminum Doors Inc
112 ndash 32nd Avenue West Bradenton Florida 34205-8907
Telephone (800) 648-6736 (941) 746-4104 Fax (941) 746-5153
22 Components
A Aluminum Members Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for strength corrosion resistance
and application of required finish
B Aluminum Door Components Minimum 5-ply composite laminated construction to include
1 Facing One-piece 0040-inch (102 mm) vertically ribbed embossed pattern 5005-H14 stretcher-leveled
aluminum alloy
2 Substrate One-piece oil-tempered hardboard backer
3 Core Organic materials shall be used to form a marine grade honeycomb core with high compression
strength of 948 psi (ASTM C365) and internal aluminum hardware backup tube
4 Hardware Backup The hardware backup tube shall be a minimum of 425-inches (10795 mm) in width
1375-inches (3493 mm) in depth with a wall thickness of 00125-inches (318 mm) Contiguous for the
full perimeter of the door to allow for all specified and non specified hardware reinforcement
5 Hardware Prep Basic to include mortise lock edge prep or cylindrical lock prep and pairs prepped for
flush bolts if required
6 Bonding Agent Environmentally friendly adhesive with strength buildup of 350 pounds per square inch
(246 kgcm2)
7 Perimeter Door Trim Wall thickness of 0050-inch (125 mm) minimum in 6063-T5 extruded aluminum
alloy with special beveled edge cap design and integral weather stripping on lock stile
8 Replaceable Door Trim Mechanically fastened to the hardware backup tube allowing for replacement in
the field if damaged
9 Trim Finish To have minimum of a Class I anodized finish
10 Weather stripping Replaceable wool pile with nylon fabric polypropylene backing meeting AAMA
701standards Applied weather stripping is not acceptable
11 Materials Only nonferrous non-rusting members shall be acceptable including tie rods screws and re-
inforcement plates
12 Regulations All components and agents to meet EPA standards
C Aluminum Frames
1 Frame Components Extruded channel 6063-T5 aluminum alloy minimum wall thickness 0125-inch
(318 mm) cut corners square and joinery shall be mechanical with no exposed fasteners
2 Profile Open Back with Applied Stop (OBS) 175-inch by 6-inch (44 x15239 mm)
3 Hinge and Strike Mounting Plates Extruded aluminum alloy bar stock 01875-inch (475 mm) thick
mounted in a concealed integral channel with no exposed fasteners
4 Replaceable Weather stripping AAMA 701 wool pile with nylon fabric polypropylene backing at head
and jambs
5 Door Stop No screw-on stops acceptable
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 08111- Page 5 of 6 Aluminum Doors and Frames MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
23 Finish
A General All finishes shall be applied and warranted by door and frame manufacturer
B Finish Aluminum flush doors and aluminum door frames shall be finished with two-coat shop applied high
performance 70 Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF) coating based on Kynar500 or Hylar 5000 resin formu-
lated by a licensed manufacturer and applied by manufacturers approved applicator to meet American Ar-
chitectural Manufacturers Association performance standard 2605 Color variation shall be no more than 2E
(CMC) when measured in accordance with MTCC 173-1989
C Color Finish color shall be selected by Owner from manufacturerrsquos full range of standard colors
24 Fabrication
A General Receive hardware if required by manufacturer
B Aluminum Flush Door Construction Of type size and design indicated
1 Minimum Thickness 175-inches (44 mm) 5-ply composite laminate system
2 Door Size Sizes shown are nominal provide standard clearances as follows
a Hinge and Lock Stiles 0125-inch (318 mm)
b Between Meeting Stiles 025-inch (635 mm)
c At Top Rails 0125-inch (318 mm)
d Between Door Bottom and Threshold 0125-inch (318 mm)
25 Accessories
A Fasteners Aluminum nonmagnetic stainless steel or other material warranted by manufacturer as non-
corrosive and compatible with aluminum components
1 Do not use exposed fasteners
B Brackets and Reinforcements Manufacturerrsquos high-strength aluminum units where feasible otherwise 316
stainless steel
C Bituminous Coating Cold-applied asphaltic mastic compounded for 30-mil (076 mm) thickness per coat
PART 3 ndash EXECUTION
31 Examination
A Verify that wall surfaces and openings are ready to receive frames and are within tolerances specified in
manufacturerrsquos instructions
B Verify that frames installed by other trades for installation of doors of this section are in strict accordance
with recommendations and approved shop drawings and within tolerances specified in manufacturerrsquos instruc-
tions
32 Preparation
A Perform cutting fitting forming drilling and grinding of frames as required for project conditions do not
damage sight-exposed finishes
B Separate dissimilar metals to prevent electrolytic action between metals
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 08111- Page 6 of 6 Aluminum Doors and Frames MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
33 Installation
A Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturerrsquos instructions and approved shop drawings set
frames plumb square level and aligned to receive doors
B Anchor frames to adjacent construction in strict accordance with recommendations and approved shop
drawings and within tolerances specified in manufacturerrsquos instructions
1 Seal metal-to-metal joints between framing members using good quality elastomeric sealant
C Where aluminum surfaces contact with metals other than stainless steel zinc or small areas of white bronze
protect from direct contact by one or more of the following methods
1 Paint dissimilar metal with one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint
2 Apply good quality elastomeric sealant between aluminum and dissimilar metal
3 Paint dissimilar metal with one coat of primer and one coat of paint recommended for aluminum surface
applications
4 Use non-absorptive tape or gasket in permanently dry locations
D Hang doors with required clearances as follows
1 Hinge and Lock Stiles 0125 inch (318 mm)
2 Between Meeting Stiles 0250 inch (635 mm)
3 At Top Rails 0125 inch (318 mm)
4 Between Door Bottom and Threshold 0125 inch (318 mm)
E Adjust doors and hardware to operate properly
34 Cleaning
A Upon completion of installation thoroughly clean door and frame surfaces in accordance with AAMA 609
B Do not use abrasive caustic or acid cleaning agents
35 Protection
A Protect products of this section from damage caused by subsequent construction until substantial comple-
tion
B Repair damaged or defective products to original specified condition in accordance with manufacturerrsquos
recommendations
C Replace damaged or defective products that cannot be repaired to Architectrsquos acceptance
END OF SECTION
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 08330- Page 1 of 4 Insulated Overhead Coiling Doors MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
SECTION 08330
INSULATED OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
101 SUMMARY
A Section Includes Manual overhead insulated rolling doors Principal components of door system shall
be aluminum (or stainless steel)
102 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A Design Requirements
1 Wind Loading Supply doors to withstand up design wind loads as required by 2015 IBC
2 Cycle Life
a Design doors of standard construction for normal use of up to 20 cycle per day maximum
3 Insulated Door Slat Material Requirements
a Flame Spread Index of 0 and a Smoke Developed Index of 10 as tested per ASTM E84
b Minimum Sound Transmission Class (STC) rating of 26 as tested per ASTM E90
c Minimum R-value of 80 (U-factor of 0125) as calculated using the ASHRAE Handbook of
Fundamentals
d Insulation to be CFC Free with an Ozone Depletion Potential (ODP) rating of zero
103 SUBMITTALS
A Reference Section 01 Submittal Procedures submit the following items
1 Product Data
2 Shop Drawings Include special conditions not detailed in Product Data Show interface with adja-
cent work
3 Quality AssuranceControl Submittals
a Provide proof of manufacturer ISO 90012008 registration
b Provide proof of manufacturer and installer qualifications - see 14 below
c Provide manufacturers installation instructions
4 Closeout Submittals
a Operation and Maintenance Manual
b Certificate stating that installed materials comply with this specification
104 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Qualifications
1 Manufacturer Qualifications ISO 90012008 registered and a minimum of five years experience in
producing doors of the type specified
2 Installer Qualifications Manufacturers approval
105 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A Follow manufacturers instructions
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 08330- Page 2 of 4 Insulated Overhead Coiling Doors MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
106 WARRANTY
A Standard Warranty Two years from date of shipment against defects in material and workmanship
B Maintenance Submit for ownerrsquos consideration and acceptance of a maintenance service agreement
for installed products
PART 2 PRODUCTS
201 MANUFACTURER
A Approved manufacturers include but are not necessarily limited to Cornell Iron Works Inc Crest-
wood Industrial Park Mountaintop PA 18707 Telephone (800) 233-8366 Fax (800) 526-0841 Un-
derwriters Laboratories Inc (UL) ISO 90012008 Registered
202 MATERIALS
A Curtain
1 Slat Material No 6F (Listed ExteriorInterior) Aluminum
a Insulation 78 inch (22 mm) foamed-in-place closed cell urethane
b Total Slat Thickness 1516 inch (24 mm)
c Slats have a Flame Spread Index of 0 and a Smoke Developed Index of 10 as tested
per ASTM E84
d Slat has an R-value of 80 and an STC rating of 26
2 Bottom Bar Reinforced extruded aluminum interior face with full depth insulation and ex-
terior skin slat to match curtain material and gauge
3 Fabricate interlocking sections with high strength [nylon] [cast iron] endlocks on alternate
slats each secured with two frac14 (635 mm) rivets Provide windlocks as required to meet
specified wind load
4 Exterior Slat Finish Clear anodized
5 Interior Slat Finish Clear anodized
6 Curtain Configuration
a Standard Curtain configuration
7 Bottom Bar Finish
a Exterior Face Match slats
b Interior Face Clear anodized
8 Bottom Bar Configuration
a Standard Bottom Bar Configuration
B Guides Fabricate with minimum 316 inch (476 mm) aluminum angles Provide windlock bars of
same material when windlocks are required to meet specified wind load Top of inner and outer guide
angles to be flared outwards to form bellmouth for smooth entry of curtain into guides Provide re-
movable guide stoppers to prevent over travel of curtain and bottom bar
1 Finish Clear anodized
2 Configuration
a Standard Guide Configuration
C Counterbalance Shaft Assembly
1 Barrel Steel pipe capable of supporting curtain load with maximum deflection of 003 inches per
foot (25 mm per meter) of width
2 Spring Balance Oil-tempered heat-treated steel helical torsion spring assembly designed for
proper balance of door to ensure that maximum effort to operate will not exceed 25 lbs (110 N)
Provide wheel for applying and adjusting spring torque
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 08330- Page 3 of 4 Insulated Overhead Coiling Doors MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
D Brackets Fabricate from minimum 316 inch (5 mm) steel plate with permanently lubricated ball or
roller bearings at rotating support points to support counterbalance shaft assembly and form end clo-
sures
1 Finish
a Steel ASTM A 123 Grade 85 zinc coating hot-dip galvanized after fabrication
E Hood 0040 inch (1016 mm) aluminum with reinforced top and bottom edges Provide minimum 14
inch (635 mm) steel intermediate support brackets as required to prevent excessive sag
F Weatherstripping
1 Bottom Bar Replaceable bulb-style compressible EDPM gasket extending into guides
2 Guides Replaceable vinyl strip on guides sealing against fascia side of curtain
3 Lintel Seal Nylon brush seal fitted at door header to impede air flow
203 ACCESSORIES
A Locking
1 Manual Chain Hoist Padlockable chain keeper on guide
204 OPERATION
A Manual Chain Hoist Provide chain hoist operator with endless steel chain chain pocket wheel and
guard geared reduction unit and chain keeper secured to guide
PART 3 EXECUTION
301 EXAMINATION
A Examine substrates upon which work will be installed and verify conditions are in accordance
with approved shop drawings
B Coordinate with responsible entity to perform corrective work on unsatisfactory substrates
C Commencement of work by installer is acceptance of substrate
302 INSTALLATION
A General Install door and operating equipment with necessary hardware anchors inserts hangers
and supports
B Follow manufacturers installation instructions
303 ADJUSTING
A Following completion of installation including related work by others lubricate test and adjust
doors for ease of operation free from warp twist or distortion
304 CLEANING
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 08330- Page 4 of 4 Insulated Overhead Coiling Doors MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
A Clean surfaces soiled by work as recommended by manufacturer
B Remove surplus materials and debris from the site
305 DEMONSTRATION
A Demonstrate proper operation to Owners Representative
B Instruct Owners Representative in maintenance procedures
END OF SECTION
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 08411- Page 1 of 3 Aluminum Framed Windows
MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
SECTION 08411
ALUMINUM FRAMED WINDOWS
PART 1 GENERAL
101 WORK INCLUDED
A Furnish and install aluminum architectural windows complete with hardware and related
components as shown on drawings and specified in this section
B All windows shall be equal to Peerless Products Inc Series 4170 Thermal F-AW80 Fixed
windows (Basis of Design)
C Glass and Glazing
1 All units shall be factory glazed
102 TESTING AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A Units shall comply with air water and structural requirements as specified in ASTM E 330-02 for
type and classification of window units required
B Test Procedures and Performance Requirements
1 Windows shall conform to all ASTM E 330-02 requirements for the type and
classification of window units required In addition the following performance criteria
must be met
2 Air Infiltration Test
a Test unit in accordance with ASTM E 283 at a static air pressure difference
of 624 psf
b Air infiltration shall not to exceed 01 cfm per square foot of crack
3 Water Resistance Test
a Test unit in accordance with ASTM E 331 amp ASTM E 547 at a static air
pressure
difference of 15 psf
b There shall be no uncontrolled water leakage
4 Uniform Load Structural Test
a Test unit in accordance with ASTM E 330 at a positive and negative static air
pressure difference of 120 psf
b There shall be no glass breakage or permanent damage
103 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Provide test reports from an AAMA certified laboratory verifying performance as specified in
section 102
B Provide test reports and window manufacturers letter of certification showing compliance with
ASTM E 330-02 for the appropriate window type
C Test reports shall be no more than four years old
104 SUBMITTALS
A Submit shop drawings finish samples test reports and warranties
1 Shop drawings shall indicate type of glazing screen and window finish to be supplied
2 Additional samples may be requested if so directed by the architect
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 08411- Page 2 of 3 Aluminum Framed Windows
MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
105 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A Protect units adequately against damage from the elements construction activities theft and other
hazards before during and after installation
106 WARRANTIES
A Manufacturers Warranties
1 Submit written warranties from window manufacturer for the following
a Windows Windows furnished are certified as fully warranted against any
defects in material or workmanship under normal use and service for a period
of one (1) year from date of fabrication
b Finish The pigmented organic finishes on windows and component parts
(such as panning trim mullions and the like) are certified as complying
fully with the requirements of the AAMA 260X specification and fully
warranted against chipping peeling cracking or blistering for a period of five
(5) years from date of installation
c Glass The insulating glass units shall be warranted from visual obstruction
due to internal moisture for a period of ten (10) years The manufacturer shall
furnish a test report and notice of product certification from an independent
laboratory showing compliance per ASTM E 2190-02 as passfail
PART 2 PRODUCTS
201 MATERIALS
A Aluminum
1 Extruded aluminum shall be 6063-T5 or T6 alloy and tempered
B Fasteners
1 Fasteners shall be aluminum non-magnetic stainless steel or other materials warranted
by the manufacturer to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum window
members trim hardware anchors and other components of the window units
2 Exposed fasteners shall not be permitted on exterior except where unavoidable for the
application of hardware
C Thermal Barrier
1 All exterior aluminum shall be separated from the interior aluminum by an integrally
concealed low-conductance structural thermal barrier in a manner that eliminates direct
metal-to-metal contact
2 Thermal barrier de-bridge space shall not be less than 316rdquo
3 Thermal barrier shall be poured-in-place two-part polyurethane that has been in use on
similar units for a period of not less than two years and has been tested to demonstrate
a Resistance to thermal conductance and condensation
b Adequate strength and security of glass retention
D Hot Melt Silicone and Glazing Beads
1 Hot Melt Silicone shall conform to AAMA 800 specification
2 Glazing beads shall be extruded aluminum and shall be of sufficient strength to retain
the glass
E Sealant
1 Sealant shall be non-shrinking non-migrating elastomeric type conforming to AAMA
803 and AAMA 808
F Glass
1 Insulated glass shall be ( ) per ASTM E 2190-02 as passfail and consisting of ( )
exterior ( ) air space and ( ) interior
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 08411- Page 3 of 3 Aluminum Framed Windows
MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
202 FABRICATION
A General
1 Units shall be able to be re-glazed without dismantling the master frame
2 All aluminum frame and sash extrusions shall have a minimum wall thickness of 0062rdquo
B Frame
1 Master frame shall be no less than 4rdquo
2 Frame components shall be mechanically fastened
C Finish
1 Organic
a Finish all exposed areas of aluminum windows and components with organic
coating of type and color as selected by the architect
b Finish shall be certified by the manufacturer to meet or exceed AAMA 2603
2604 or 2605 specification
PART 3 EXECUTION
30 INSPECTION
A Job Conditions
1 Verify that openings are dimensionally within allowable tolerances plumb level clean
provide a solid anchoring surface and are in accordance with the approved shop
drawings
302 INSTALLATION
A Work to be completed in accordance with the approved shop drawings and specifications by
skilled tradesmen
B Set units plumb and level in a single plane for each wall plane without warp or rack of frames or
sash Adequately anchor units in place separating aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from
sources of corrosion or electrolytic action
C Adjust window units for proper operation after installation
D Furnish and apply sealants to provide a weather tight installation
E Leave all exposed surfaces clean smooth and free of debris
303 ANCHORAGE
A Adequately anchor to maintain permanent position when subjected to normal movement and
loading
304 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A After completion of installation units shall be inspected adjust and promptly cleaned to prevent
damage to finish or glazing
B Remove excess sealant labels dirt and other substances
C Initiate all protection and other precautions required to insure that units will be without damage or
deterioration at time of acceptance
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 08711- Page 1 of 8 Finish Hardware
MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
SECTION 08711
FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
101 SCOPE
A Work under this section is comprised of furnishing and installing finish hardware specified herein and
noted on the drawings for a complete and operational system including any electrified hardware
components systems and controls
B Product and hardware schedule submittals
C It is the CONTRACTORrsquos responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors
suppliers and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of CONTRACTORrsquos Work
102 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A Drawings and general conditions of contract including general and supplementary conditions and
Division 1-specification sections apply to this section
103 RELATED WORK
A Specified elsewhere that should be examined for its effect upon this section
1 Section 08111 ndash Aluminum Doors and Frames
104 HARDWARE COMPLIANCE
A Provide only hardware that has been tested and listed by UL for types and sizes of doors required and
complies with requirements of door and door frame All hardware used on fire labeled openings will be
listed for those types of openings and bear the identifying label indicating UL (Underwriterrsquos
Laboratories) approved for use on fire doors
B All hardware specified herein will be in compliance (to the extent required) with
1 NFPA-80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Windows
2 NFPA-101- Life Safety Code
3 ADA the Americans with Disabilities Act ndash title III ndash Public Accommodations
4 ANSI-A 1171 ndash American National Standards Institute ndash Accessible and Usable Buildings and
Facilities
5 UL ndash Underwriterrsquos Laboratories
6 WHI ndash Warnock Hersey International Division of INCHAPE Testing Services
7 TAS - Texas Accessibility Standards
8 State and local codes including authority having jurisdiction
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 08711- Page 2 of 8 Finish Hardware
MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
105 GENERAL
A Finish hardware must be neatly and properly installed in accordance with the best practices as
approved by the Ownerrsquos Representative
B No extra cost will be allowed because of changes or corrections necessary to facilitate the proper
installation of any hardware The General Contractor will be responsible for the proper fabrication of
all work or materials to receive the hardware
C Any specified hardware not specifically mentioned herein will be called to the attention of the
Architect during the bidding period so that an addendum may be prepared to cover such items It will
be the responsibility of the successful bidder to furnish all required finish hardware whether or not
herein mentioned unless excluded from this section of the specifications
106 QUALIFICATIONS
A The finish hardware supplier will be a person or firm technically proficient and experienced in this
trade who has been furnishing ldquoInstitutional Graderdquo hardware in the Austin area for not less than five
years and will be responsible for properly detailing and fitting material to the conditions required by
the Drawings
B Hardware supplier to be a qualified ldquodirect distributorrdquo of the products to be furnished In addition the
supplier is to have in their employment an AHC representative certified by the ldquoDoor and
Hardware Instituterdquo who will be made available at reasonable times to consult with the Architect
Contractor and Ownerrsquos Representative regarding any matters affecting the finish hardware
C Installer for mechanical hardware shall have a minimum of 2 years of experience of installing
architectural finish hardware and attend a pre-installation meeting with the manufacturerrsquos
representative of locks exit devices and closers
107 SUBMITTALS
A Hardware Schedule in a prudent and timely manner submit copies of schedule in accordance with
Division 1 General Requirements Schedule will be in ldquovertical formatrdquo listing each door opening
including handing of opening all hardware scheduled for opening or otherwise required to allow for
proper function of door opening as intended and finish of hardware
B Submit manufacturerrsquos cut sheets on all hardware items
C The General Contractor will deliver finish hardware templates to and coordinate with related door and
frame suppliers
D The General Contractor will furnish to Ownerrsquos Representative one complete copy of installation
instructions and maintenance guides on all hardware both electrical and mechanical
108 DELIVERY HANDLING AND PACKAGING
A Furnish all hardware to the jobsite securely boxed bagged wrapped or packaged with each unit clearly
marked and numbered in accordance with the hardware schedule Include door and item number for
each
B Pack each item complete with all necessary parts and fasteners Include whatever information may be
necessary to show compliance with requirements and include instructions for installation and for
maintenance of operating parts and finish Transmit copy of applicable data to Installer
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 08711- Page 3 of 8 Finish Hardware
MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
C Hardware supplier is responsible for setting-up the hardware on the site in a suitable dry and secure
room provided by the General Contractor
19 WARRANTY
A Provide warranty that all items furnished under this section of the specification will be free of defects
in material and workmanship and will perform the services for which it was intended for a period of
one (1) year for door closers and ten (10) years for exit devices Replace repair or adjust any items
not fulfilling this warranty at no further expense to Owner
110 TEMPLATES
A The General Contractor will furnish in a timely manner finish hardware templates to each supplier or
fabricator of doors frames and other work to be factory-prepared for the installation of hardware
Contractor will check the shop drawings of such other work to confirm that adequate provisions are
made for the proper installation of hardware with all specified operating characteristics and clearances
111 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A Provide Owner with manufacturerrsquos parts list and maintenance instructions under provisions of the
General Conditions for each type of hardware supplied and necessary wrenches and tools required for
proper maintenance of hardware
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
201 HARDWARE
A Manufacturers as follows
Manufacturer Abbreviation Website
Best Access BES wwwbestaccesscom
Bommer Industries Inc BOM wwwbommercom
Falcon FAL wwwfalconlockcom
Glynn Johnson GLY wwwglynn-johnsoncom
Hager Hinge Company HAG wwwhagerhingecom
Ives IVE wwwivesingersollrandcom
LCN LCN wwwlcncloserscom
National Guard NGP wwwngpinccom
Rockwood ROC wwwrockwoodmfgcom
Schlage SCH wwwschlagecom
TrimcoBBWQuality TRI wwwtrimcobbwcom
Von Duprin VON wwwvonduprincom
Zero ZER wwwzerointernationalcom
203 FINISHES
A All exposed hardware will be dull chrome (US 26 D) finish unless otherwise noted Closers will be
powder coated epoxy enamel to match adjacent hardware finish
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 08711- Page 4 of 8 Finish Hardware
MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
204 FASTENINGS
A As required for finished installation
B Hardware furnished under this section of the specifications will be complete with all necessary screws
bolts anchors adapter brackets or other fastenings for proper application Such fastenings will be of
suitable size and type and will harmonize with hardware as to material and finish and as the
manufacturer supplies with their products Stops thresholds and holders will be fastened to concrete
with steel drop-in anchors and to doors with sex bolts All closers and exit devices will be thru-bolted
C Utilize screws and installation tools provided with the hardware No other screws or attachments are
acceptable Self-taping screws will not be accepted unless provided by the manufacturer
205 LEVERS AND TRIM
A Levers will be cast or forged solid brass (dull chrome US 26 D or 626) or stainless steel (US 32
D or 630) Zinc alloys or pot metal material will not be acceptable
B Roses for use with levers will be wrought brass or stainless steel and will have built-in
deadstops with concealed springs to keep lever from sagging
206 LOCKS AND LATCHES
A Will be of the mortise type only All locksets latchsets electrified locksets cylinders and trim
to be of one manufacturer as hereafter listed for continuity of design and consideration of
warranty
B Case will be of 090 gauge Cold formed steel zinc dichromate plated 6rdquo high by 4-14rdquo wide by
1rdquo wide with post indexed trim
C Front will be armored wrought brass bronze or stainless steel adjustable for door bevel
reinforced by heavy gauge steel with stabilizing ribs fastened by machine screws Fronts will be
8rdquo x 1-14rdquo in size
D Strikes will be ASA size of brass or bronze with lips of length to protect all jamb trim but will
be no longer than so required Provide and install stamped box strikes at all locations
E Latch bolts will be three-piece anti-friction type 58rdquo wide 1rdquo high and with no less than frac34rdquo
protection with no delarin or plastic parts
F Deadbolts will be solid brass or bronze chrome plated with two hardened free-floating steel
pins to prevent sawing Size to be 58rdquo wide 1-38rdquo high and no less than 1rdquo projection
Hardened steel rollers are required with the deadbolt
G Backset will be 2-34rdquo
H Hubs will be forged brass or hardened steel Lever action will be balanced mechanically to
provide equal pressure on knob in either direction to actuate the latchbolt
I Springs will be a coiled spring for latchbolt return and a coiled torsion spring for hub return
J Spring will be 3-58rdquo x 2-78rdquo plus or minus 316rdquo
K Cases may provide apertures for post-indexed trim
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 08711- Page 5 of 8 Finish Hardware
MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
207 DOOR CLOSERS
A LCN 4041 (representative product) or approved equal
B All door closers unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings will be heavy duty
surface mounted full rack and pinion liquid (hydraulic) type with cast iron cylinders capable
of controlling door through 180 degrees of swing Provide full covers of non-ferrous non-
corrosive material painted to match the adjacent hardware finish
C Surface closers will be adjusted by key valves Furnish six (6) adjusting keys Spring power of
each closer will be adjustable and will be capable of meeting handicapped accessibility code
requirements
D No closer will be installed on the outside of any exterior door or on the corridor side of any
room door Wherever it is necessary to install a closer on the side of a door away from the butts
a parallel arm will be used Corner or soffit brackets will not be permitted Corridor installation
is acceptable where abutting walls prevent normal installation All fastenings to the door will be
by sex bolts
E Closers to have adjustable spring power which allows for closer sizing Closers to have separate
tamper resistant non-critical regulating hydraulic screw valves for closing speed latching
speed and backcheck control as a standard feature
F All parallel arms will be extra heavy-duty solid forged steel (EDA Extra Duty Arm) All closers
without exception will be installed to 180ordm door swing specifications Closers shall not have
soffit stops
G All door closers must be covered by a ten-year factory guarantee against defective material or
workmanship
H The successful bidder is required to keep in touch with the progress of the job and have a
factory trained representative visit the job prior to installation to train the General Contractorrsquos
installer on proper techniques and once again insure that all closers are properly adjusted at
completion of the installation
208 HINGES
A (BUTTS) BB1168 Series Hager (representative product) or approved equal
B Hinges will be five-knuckle standard or heavy-duty ball bearing button-tip full mortise
template type hinges
C At labeled doors or doors with closers provide steel (painted) bearing-type hinges
D Exterior door hinges will be of steel (painted) with non-removable pins or will have pins held in
place by a set screw which can only be removed while the door is open
E Provide heavyweight hinges on all openings with high frequency usage as indicated in the
hardware schedule
F Hinges (butts) will be of the class as indicated by manufacturerrsquos number in the hardware sets All
hinges will have sufficient throw to clear the door trim plinth or cove base but will have no
more throw than is necessary
G Hinges will be sized as follows
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 08711- Page 6 of 8 Finish Hardware
MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
1 Doors 3rsquo-0rdquo wide or less 4-12rdquo x 4-12rdquo (1-12 pair hinges)
H Quantity of hinges per door will be as follows
1 Door up to 90rdquo in height 1-12 pair (3)
209 EXIT DEVICES
A Falcon 2425 Series or Von Duprin 3399 Series
B Vertical rod exit devices will not be accepted
C Exit devices to be UL listed for life safety All exit devices for labeled doors will bear the UL
label for ldquofire exit hardwarerdquo All devices will comply with NFPA 80 and NFPA 101
requirements
210 DOOR STOPS
A Wall Mounted Trimco 1209W
B place door stops in such a position that they permit maximum door swing but do not present a
hazard or obstruction All floor mounted door stops will be installed using flush bolts and steel
drop-in anchors manufactured by Ramset or Red Head Anchors will be set at least one inch into
the concrete Lead anchors will not be allowed Floor stops shall be placed as far from the hinge
edge of the door so as to not allow a trip hazard
C Exterior door stops when possible should be wall mounted on a wing wall or recess that acts to
stop the door from swinging more than 90 degrees from the closed position If wing walls are
not possible to construct the alternative floor mounted stop is to be provided with appropriate
railing to prevent a tripping hazard
211 GASKETING
A Provide materials and finishes as listed in the hardware schedule or as shown on the Drawings
All thresholds must be in accordance with the requirements of ANSI A1171 and the ADA If no
thresholds or gasketing is specified provide thresholds and complete gasketing at all exterior
doors and smoke seals at all interior fire rated doors as follows
212 PRODUCT STANDARDS SUBSTITUTIONS
A Unless otherwise approved in writing provide only the specified products
B All requests for substitutions must be made prior to bid in accordance with Division 1 General
Conditions and are to be in writing and delivered to the Architect
PART 3 - EXECUTION
301 INSTALLATION
A Hardware installers shall be professional hardware installers with ten years of documented
hardware installation experience Contractor shall submit hardware installerrsquos names and
experience qualifications to Architect and Owner for review and approval prior to start of
hardware installation
B Check hardware against the reviewed hardware schedule upon delivery Do not install hardware
when it is apparent that the scheduled hardware will not function properly for the application for
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 08711- Page 7 of 8 Finish Hardware
MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
which it was intended Contact the Architect immediately for clarification and correction of the
application ndash prior to installation of the incorrect hardware
C Finish hardware installed prior to the building being ldquodried inrdquo and ldquoclimate conditionedrdquo which
shows any signs of rusting wear or abuse will be subject to rejection by the Architect or
Ownerrsquos Representative Any such rejected hardware will be replaced at no cost to Owner by
the General Contractor
D Mount hardware units at heights recommended in ldquoRecommended Location for Buildersrsquo
Hardwarerdquo by BHMA except as otherwise specifically indicated or required to comply with
governing regulations including ADA and the Accessibility Standards of the Architectural
Barriers Act Article 9102 of the Texas Civil Statutes except as may be otherwise directed by
the Architect Use only the fasteners supplied by the manufacturer All fastening points will be
used
E Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturerrsquos instructions and
recommendations Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into
surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way install each item completely
and then remove and store in a secure place during the finish application After completion of
the finishes re-install each item Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been
completed on the substrate The use of cardboard shim stock is prohibited
F Set units level plumb and true to line and location Adjust and reinforce the attachment
substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation Mortise and cutting to be done
neatly and evidence of cutting to be concealed in the finished work
G Drill and countersink units that are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners Space fasteners
and anchors in accordance with industry standards
H Mount door stops using plated flathead screws and steel drop-in anchors
I Take care when using cleaning chemicals around finish hardware so as not to damage the finish
J Architect Ownerrsquos Representative and Finish Hardware Supplier shall inspect completed
hardware installation and operation upon completion of hardware installation Hardware
installer shall correct any installation deficiencies noted during this inspection
302 FINAL ADJUSTMENT
A Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy
of a space or area return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and
make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area Clean and re-
lubricate operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and
doors
B Instruct Ownerrsquos personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware during the final
adjustment of hardware
C Door closers will be adjusted by a carpenter trained by the hardware supplier trained personnel
at completion of installation and again one month prior to expiration of the Contractorrsquos one-
year anniversary of substantial completion
303 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 08711- Page 8 of 8 Finish Hardware
MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
After installation has been completed obtain the services of a qualified hardware consultant to check
for proper application of finish hardware according to the finish hardware schedule keying schedule
and specifications In addition check all hardware for adjustments and proper operation
END OF SECTION
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 08800- Page 1 of 6 Glazing MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
SECTION 08800
GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
101 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section
102 SUMMARY
A This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications including those specified in
other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section
1 Windows
103 DEFINITIONS
A Manufacturer A firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in referenced glazing
publications
104 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A General Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and im-
pact loads (where applicable) without failure including loss or glass breakage attributable to the follow-
ing defective manufacture fabrication and installation failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight
and airtight deterioration of glazing materials or other defects in construction
B Glass Design Glass thicknesses indicated are minimums and are for detailing only Confirm glass thick-
nesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions Provide glass lites for various size openings
in nominal thicknesses indicated but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated)
required to meet or exceed the following criteria
C Thermal Movements Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following
maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and
glazing components Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar
heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss
1 Temperature Change (Range) 120 deg F (67 deg C) ambient 180 deg F (100 deg C) material
surfaces
105 SUBMITTALS
A Product Data For each glass product and glazing material indicated
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 08800- Page 2 of 6 Glazing MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
B Glazing Schedule Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a
schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location
C Product Certificates Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products fur-
nished comply with requirements
D Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report From glazing sealant manufacturer indicating
glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates and for compatibility
with glass and other glazing materials
E Product Test Reports From a qualified testing agency indicating the following products comply with re-
quirements based on comprehensive testing of current products
1 Glazing sealants
2 Glazing gaskets
F Warranties Special warranties specified in this Section
106 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Installer Qualifications An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material design
and extent to that indicated for Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of suc-
cessful in-service performance
B Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each product
and installation method indicated
C Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Testing Obtain sealant test results for product test reports in Sub-
mittals Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-
month period
1 Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications An independent testing agency qualified according to
ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated as documented according to ASTM E 548
2 Test elastomeric glazing sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to
ASTM C 920 and where applicable to other standard test methods
D Safety Glass Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and
ANSI Z971
1 Subject to compliance with requirements permanently mark safety glass with certification label of
Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities hav-
ing jurisdiction
E Glazing Publications Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and or-
ganizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated Refer to these publications for glaz-
ing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards
1 GANA Publications GANAS Glazing Manual
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 08800- Page 3 of 6 Glazing MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
107 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A Protect glazing materials according to manufacturers written instructions and as needed to prevent dam-
age to glass and glazing materials from condensation temperature changes direct exposure to sun or
other causes
108 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A Environmental Limitations Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature condi-
tions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates
are wet from rain frost condensation or other causes
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
201 INSULATED GLASS
A Glazing Insulated glazing unit consisting of two panes of 316rdquo separated by a hermetically sealed void
Inner surface of the outer pane of glass (surface 2) shall be provided with a Low E coating Unit shall
maintain a Solar Heat Gain Coefficient of not more than 050 and a U Factor of not more than 050
202 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS
A General Provide products of type indicated complying with the following requirements
1 Compatibility Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materi-
als they will contact including glass products seals of insulating-glass units and glazing channel
substrates under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer
based on testing and field experience
2 Suitability Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers written instructions for selecting glazing
sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation
3 Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range for
this characteristic
B Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for
each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant in the Glazing Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3 in-
cluding those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type grade class and uses
203 GLAZING TAPES
A Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape Preformed butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100
percent nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces with or without spacer rod as
recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated packaged on rolls
with a release paper backing and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated
below
1 AAMA 8063 tape for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure
2 AAMA 8073 tape for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 08800- Page 4 of 6 Glazing MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
B Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape Closed-cell PVC foam tape factory coated with adhesive on both sur-
faces packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive and complying with AAMA 800 for the
following types
1 Type 1 for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant
2 Type 2 for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid
sealant
204 GLAZING GASKETS
A Lock-Strip Gaskets Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated fabricated into frames with molded
corner units and zipper lock strips complying with ASTM C 542 black
B Dense Compression Gaskets Molded or extruded gaskets complying with standards referenced with
name of elastomer utilized and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal
C Soft Compression Gaskets Extruded or molded closed-cell integral-skinned gaskets complying with
ASTM C 509 Type II black and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal
205 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A General Provide products of material size and shape complying with referenced glazing standard re-
quirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated and with a
proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation
B Cleaners Primers and Sealers Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer
C Setting Blocks Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85 plus or minus 5
D Spacers Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by
glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated
E Edge Blocks Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking)
F Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing ASTM C 1330 Type O (open-cell material) of size and density to
control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance
206 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS
A Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project with
edge and face clearances edge and surface conditions and bite complying with written instructions of
product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard to comply with system performance requirements
PART 3 - EXECUTION
301 EXAMINATION
A Examine framing glazing with Installer present for compliance with the following
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 08800- Page 5 of 6 Glazing MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
1 Manufacturing and installation tolerances including those for size squareness and offsets at cor-
ners
2 Presence and functioning of weep system
3 Minimum required face or edge clearances
4 Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members
B Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
302 PREPARATION
A Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing Remove
coatings not firmly bonded to substrates
303 GLAZING GENERAL
A Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of framing systems glass sealants gaskets
and other glazing materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated including those in refer-
enced glazing publications
B Glazing channel dimensions provide necessary bite on glass minimum edge and face clearances and ad-
equate sealant thicknesses with reasonable tolerances Adjust as required by Project conditions during in-
stallation
C Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation Remove damaged glass from Project
site and legally dispose of off Project site Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfec-
tions that when installed could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance
D Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants as determined by preconstruction
sealant-substrate testing
E Install setting blocks in sill rabbets sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications un-
less otherwise required by glass manufacturer Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for
heel bead
F Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites
G Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm)
H Provide edge blocking where needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel as
recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing pub-
lications
I Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern draw bow and similar characteristics
J Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on oppo-
site side provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to move-
ment
K Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket
manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recom-
mended by gasket manufacturer
9172018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 08800- Page 6 of 6 Glazing MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
304 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to fram-
ing held away from glass Do not apply markers to glass surface Remove nonpermanent labels and clean
surfaces
B Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations includ-
ing weld splatter If despite such protection contaminating substances do come into contact with glass
remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer
C Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent in-
tervals during construction but not less than once a month for build-up of dirt scum alkaline deposits
or stains remove as recommended by glass manufacturer
D Remove and replace glass that is broken chipped cracked abraded or damaged in any way including
natural causes accidents and vandalism during construction period
E Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date sched-
uled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion Wash glass as recommended by glass
manufacturer
END OF SECTION
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 09900- Page 1 of 8 Painting MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
101 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section
102 SUMMARY
A This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following
1 Exposed exterior items and surfaces
2 Exposed interior items and surfaces
3 Surface preparation priming and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop
priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections
B Paint exposed surfaces except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be
painted or is to remain natural If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface
paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indi-
cate colors If the schedules do not indicate color or finish the Architect will select from standard colors
and finishes available
C Do not paint prefinished items concealed surfaces finished metal surfaces operating parts and labels
1 Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components
a Finished mechanical and electrical equipment
b Light fixtures
c Distribution cabinets
2 Finished metal surfaces include the following
a Anodized aluminum
b Stainless steel
c Galvanized roof and wall panels trim and accessories
d Galvanized framing members
e Structural members provided with protective coatings in accordance with other specifica-
tion sections and not specifically noted to be painted
3 Labels Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Factory Mutual (FM) or other code-
required labels or equipment name identification performance rating or nomenclature plates
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 09900- Page 2 of 8 Painting MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
103 DEFINITIONS
A General Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section
1 Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-
degree meter
2 Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a 60-
degree meter
3 Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60-
degree meter
4 Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured at
a 60-degree meter
5 Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a 60-
degree meter
104 SUBMITTALS
A Product Data For each paint system specified Include block fillers and primers
B Samples for Initial Selection Manufacturers color charts showing the full range of colors available for
each type of finish-coat material indicated
105 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Applicator Qualifications Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applica-
tions similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service
performance
B Source Limitations Obtain block fillers primers and undercoat materials for each coating system from
the same manufacturer as the finish coats
106 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturers original unopened packages and containers bearing
manufacturers name and label and the following information
1 Product name or title of material
2 Product description (generic classification or binder type)
3 Manufacturers stock number and date of manufacture
4 Contents by volume for pigment and vehicle constituents
5 Thinning instructions
6 Application instructions
7 Color name and number
8 VOC content
B Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient
temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C) Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition free of for-
eign materials and residue
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 09900- Page 3 of 8 Painting MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
1 Protect from freezing Keep storage area neat and orderly Remove oily rags and waste daily Take
necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health haz-
ards resulting from handling mixing and application
107 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air tem-
peratures are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C)
B Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F (72 and 35 deg C)
C Do not apply paint in snow rain fog or mist or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent or at
temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point or to damp or wet surfaces
1 Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed
and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying pe-
riods
108 EXTRA MATERIALS
A Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied in the quantities de-
scribed below Package paint materials in unopened factory-sealed containers for storage and identify
with labels describing contents Deliver extra materials to the Owner
1 Quantity Furnish the Owner with 1 gallon of each color and each type of paint used on the pro-
ject
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
201 MANUFACTURERS
A Available Products Subject to compliance with requirements products that may be incorporated into the
Work include but are not limited to products listed in the paint schedules For all paint classifications
Sherwin Williams Co (S-W) products are listed as representative examples Products from other manu-
facturers that can be demonstrated to be equal in composition and material properties will also be ac-
ceptable upon approval by the Architect
202 PAINT MATERIALS GENERAL
A Material Compatibility Provide primers undercoats and finish-coat materials that are compatible with
one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer based on testing and field experience
B Material Quality Provide manufacturers best-quality paint material of the various coating types speci-
fied Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturers product identification will not be acceptable
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 09900- Page 4 of 8 Painting MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
1 Proprietary Names Use of manufacturers proprietary product names to designate colors or mate-
rials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of
equivalent products of other manufacturers Furnish manufacturers material data and certificates
of performance for proposed substitutions
C Colors Provide color selections made by the Architect
PART 3 - EXECUTION
301 EXAMINATION
A Examine substrates areas and conditions with the Applicator present under which painting will be per-
formed for compliance with paint application requirements
1 Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces re-
ceiving paint are thoroughly dry
2 Start of painting will be construed as the Applicators acceptance of surfaces and conditions within
a particular area
B Coordination of Work Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of
the total system for various substrates
302 PREPARATION
A General Remove hardware and hardware accessories plates machined surfaces lighting fixtures and
similar items already installed that are not to be painted If removal is impractical or impossible because
of the size or weight of the item provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and paint-
ing
1 After completing painting operations in each space or area reinstall items removed using workers
skilled in the trades involved
B Cleaning Before applying paint or other surface treatments clean the substrates of substances that could
impair the bond of the various coatings Remove oil and grease before cleaning
1 Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not
fall on wet newly painted surfaces
C Surface Preparation Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturers written instruc-
tions for each particular substrate condition and as specified
1 Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime
2 Ferrous Metals Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated re-
move oil grease dirt loose mill scale and other foreign substances Use solvent or mechanical
cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Councils (SSPC) recommenda-
tions
a Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before
priming
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 09900- Page 5 of 8 Painting MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
b Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged Wire-brush
clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer and touch up with the same pri-
mer as the shop coat
3 Galvanized Surfaces Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is
free of oil and surface contaminants Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated
from coil stock by mechanical methods
D Materials Preparation Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturers written instructions
1 Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition free of foreign materi-
als and residue
2 Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density Stir as required during
application Do not stir surface film into material If necessary remove surface film and strain ma-
terial before using
3 Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits
303 APPLICATION
A General Apply paint according to manufacturers written instructions Use applicators and techniques
best suited for substrate and type of material being applied
1 Paint colors surface treatments and finishes are indicated in the schedules
2 Do not paint over dirt rust scale grease moisture scuffed surfaces or conditions detrimental to
formation of a durable paint film
3 Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used
4 The term exposed surfaces includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures are in
place Extend coatings in these areas as required
5 Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces Be-
fore the final installation of equipment paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or fur-
niture with prime coat only
6 Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat nonspecular black paint where visible through registers
or grilles
7 Finish exterior doors on tops bottoms and side edges the same as exterior faces
B Scheduling Painting Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned pretreated or otherwise pre-
pared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration
1 The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application meth-
od Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manu-
facturer If sanding is required to produce a smooth even surface according to manufacturers
written instructions sand between applications
2 Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted
3 If undercoats stains or other conditions show through final coat of paint apply additional coats
until paint film is of uniform finish color and appearance Give special attention to ensure edges
corners crevices welds and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of
flat surfaces
4 Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying Do not recoat surfaces un-
til paint has dried to where it feels firm does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb
pressure and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose
adhesion
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 09900- Page 6 of 8 Painting MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
C Application Procedures Apply paints and coatings by brush roller spray or other applicators according
to manufacturers written instructions
1 Brushes Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied Use brush of appropriate size for
the surface or item being painted
2 Rollers Use rollers of carpet velvet back or high-pile sheeps wool as recommended by the man-
ufacturer for the material and texture required
3 Spray Equipment Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufac-
turer for the material and texture required
D Minimum Coating Thickness Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturers recommended spread-
ing rate Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer
E Prime Coats Before applying finish coats apply a prime coat of material as recommended by the manu-
facturer to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others
Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears
to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing
F Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth opaque sur-
face of uniform finish color appearance and coverage Cloudiness spotting holidays laps brush marks
runs sags ropiness or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable
G Transparent (Clear) Finishes Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster
Provide a finish free of laps runs cloudiness color irregularity brush marks orange peel nail holes or
other surface imperfections
1 Provide satin finish for final coats
H Stipple Enamel Finish Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture Leave no evidence of roll-
ing such as laps irregularity in texture skid marks or other surface imperfections
I Completed Work Match approved samples for color texture and coverage Remove refinish or repaint
work not complying with requirements
304 CLEANING
A Cleanup At the end of each workday remove empty cans rags rubbish and other discarded paint mate-
rials from the site
1 After completing painting clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces Remove spattered paint by
washing and scraping Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces
305 PROTECTION
A Protect work of other trades whether being painted or not against damage by painting Correct damage
by cleaning repairing or replacing and repainting as approved by Architect
306 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 09900- Page 7 of 8 Painting MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
A Ferrous Metal Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal Primer is not required on
shop-primed items
1 Full-Gloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish 2 finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer
a Primer Rust-inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manu-
facturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 13 mils (0033 mm)
1) S-W Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2B50W1
b First and Second Coats Full-gloss exterior alkyd enamel applied at spreading rate rec-
ommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 30
mils (0076 mm)
1) S-W Industrial Enamel B-54 Series
2 Deep-Color Full-Gloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish 2 finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer
a Primer Rust-inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manu-
facturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 14 mils (0036 mm)
1) S-W Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2B50W1
b First and Second Coats Deep-color full-gloss exterior alkyd enamel applied at spreading
rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than
37 mils (0094 mm)
1) S-W SWP Exterior Gloss Paint A-2 Series
B Zinc-Coated Metal Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc-coated (galvanized) metal
surfaces
1 Full-Gloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish 2 finish coats over a galvanized metal primer
a Primer Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufac-
turer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 12 mils (0031 mm)
1) S-W Galvite Paint B50W3
b First and Second Coats Full-gloss exterior alkyd enamel applied at spreading rate rec-
ommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 26
mils (0066 mm)
1) S-W Industrial Enamel B-54 Series
307 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A Ferrous Metal Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal
1 Full-Gloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish 2 finish coats over an enamel undercoater and a primer
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 09900- Page 8 of 8 Painting MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
a Primer Quick-drying rust-inhibitive alkyd-based or epoxy-metal primer as recommended
by the manufacturer for this substrate applied at spreading rate recommended by the manu-
facturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 15 mils (0038 mm)
1) S-W Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2B50W1
b Undercoat Alkyd interior enamel undercoat or full-gloss interior alkyd-enamel finish
coat as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate applied at spreading rate rec-
ommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 12
mils (0031 mm)
1) S-W Industrial Enamel B-54 Series
c Finish Coat Full-gloss alkyd interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by
the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 12 mils (0031 mm)
1) S-W Industrial Enamel B-54 Series
B Zinc-Coated Metal Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc-coated (galvanized) metal
surfaces
1 Full-Gloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish 2 finish coats over a galvanized metal primer
a Primer Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufac-
turer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 12 mils (0031 mm)
1) S-W Galvite Paint B50W3
b First and Second Coats Full-gloss exterior alkyd enamel applied at spreading rate rec-
ommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 26
mils (0066 mm)
1) S-W Industrial Enamel B-54 Series
END OF SECTION
11202017 10400 ndash Page 1 of 8 Signage
SECTION 10400
SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
101 SUMMARY
A This Section includes warning signs and architectural signs as indicated on PLANS andor specified in other Sections
B Types of identification devices specified in this Section include the following
1 Warning Signs a HazardCaution Signs
b Right-To-Know Signs and
c Other Signs
2 Architectural Signs a Building Identification SignsRoom identification signs
102 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A PLANS or attachment to this Section show sign type lettering and locations
B Identification of mechanical and electrical equipment is covered in other Sections
C Related work as called for on PLANS or in this or other TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Sections
103 SUBMITTALS
A Furnish the following in accordance with Specification Section 01300 Submittals and Section 01730 Operation and Maintenance Data Submittals shall include the following
1 Manufacturers complete color range and typefont styles Font style shall at minimum include Times New Roman and Optima Semi Bold upper and lower case
2 Sign layout with shop drawings as follows a Scale layout of all site signs
b Full size layout of typical Room Identification Restrictive and Process Identification signs
c Full size layout and text of Dedication Plaque
3 Submit two each of the following samples Samples shall be resubmitted as required until approved
11202017 10400 ndash Page 2 of 8 Signage
a A 12-in minimum square sample of proposed encapsulated Site Sign with subsurface graphics and 12-in mounting post and spacer attached
b A 12-in minimum square sample of each proposed plastic restrictive sign and proposed framing and mounting device
c A 6-in minimum square sample of proposed plastic sign showing proposed framing and mounting device andor pressure sensitive vinyl for Room Identification cut into letters in the colors proposed for the required color scheme
4 Cleaning and maintenance instructions for all signage components
104 WARRANTY
A Furnish minimum five year manufacturer warranty
105 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Warning Signs In accordance with OSHA Regulation Paragraph 1910145 ldquoSpecifications for Accident Prevention Signs and Tagsrdquo
106 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A Deliver and store signs in original shipping containers with manufacturer and contents clearly marked and showing on exterior Handle signs per manufacturerrsquos recommendations to prevent damage
107 PROJECTSITE CONDITIONS
A Inside
1 Unconditioned Areas a Temperature 50deg to 105degF
b Relative Humidity 95 maximum
2 Conditioned Areas a Temperature 65deg to 80degF
b Relative Humidity 75 maximum
B Outside
1 Temperature 0deg to 120degF
2 Relative Humidity 100 maximum
11202017 10400 ndash Page 3 of 8 Signage
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
201 MANUFACTURERS
A Manufacturer Subject to compliance with the requirements of this Section provide identification signs from one of the following manufacturers
1 Seton Name Plate Company
2 Carlton Industries Inc
3 WH Brady Co Signmark Division and
4 Direct Safety Company
5 Architectural Signage Products 5214 Burleson Rd Suite 405-6 Austin Texas
6 Austin Architectural Graphics 516 Navasota Austin Texas
7 Innovative Graphics Systems PO Box 33139 Austin Texas 78764
8 Trinity Sign Graphics 7802 Doncast Austin Texas 78745
9 The Southwell Company PO Box 299 San Antonio Texas 78291
202 MATERIALS ANDOR EQUIPMENT
A Building Sign Blanks Use aluminum sign blanks appropriately sized for lettering required nominal size of 12Prime high times 36Prime wide or 24Prime high times 36Prime wide and nominal sheet thickness of 0040-inch minimum All exposed surfaces shall be matte finish as approved
B Warning Signs
1 High Performance Plastic UV resistant (4-5 years) minimum thickness 0060Prime with rounded corners and drilled holes Service temperature -40degF to 175degF
2 Pressure Sensitive Vinyl UV resistant (4-5 years) minimum thickness 0004Prime with square corners and service temperature of -40degF to 175degF
C Colors as specified in Table 1 of Fundamental Specification of Safety Colors for CIE Standard Source ldquoCrdquo American National Standard Institute Z531 - 1967
D Supports and Fasteners Stainless steel
E Posts 2-inch galvanized steel
F Concrete Class A
G Interior Room Identification signs 18 - thick Westinghouse Micarta raised graphics with domed Braille square corner and no borders applied as indicated on the Drawings and comply with ADA and ANSI A1171 requirements The adhesive and finish surface shall be protected with one piece removable liners
11202017 10400 ndash Page 4 of 8 Signage
H Word and Picture Signs 18 - thick Westinghouse Micarta raised graphics with domed Braille square corner and no borders applied as indicated on the Drawings and comply with ADA ANSI A 1171 and OSHA The adhesive and finish surface shall be protected with one piece removable liners Colors shall be in contrasting colors as selected by Owners representative from manufacturers standard full color range
1 Word and Picture (WP) types shall include but not limited to the following (refer to signage schedule) WP236RB (Stairs) WP260RB (In Case of Fire Do not Use Elevator Use Stairs) WP237 (Exit) WP251 (Fire Extinguisher) WP284 (No Smoking in Elevator) WP278 (Emergency Shower) WP279 (Emergency Eye Wash) WP293 (Danger-High Voltage)
I Site Signs
1 For bidding purposes text and composition of site signs shall be as shown on Drawings Final text and composition shall be as shown on approved shop drawings Signs shall be located as shown
2 Signs shall be provided with galvanized U-channel posts Handicapped parking signage shall be white lettering and symbol on blue background (SS 53) and Alternative FuelCarpool Van parking signage shall be black lettering on white background (SS 49 sim)
3 Site signs shall be designed to withstand wind loading of 30 psf without damage or permanent deflection
203 FABRICATION
A Workmanship Drill or punch holes for bolts and screws Drilling and punching to produce clean true lines and surfaces Exposed surfaces of work to have a smooth finish Conceal fastenings where practicable
204 SIGN COLORS AND FONTS
A Warning Signs In accordance with OSHA recognized colors and heading descriptions
B With exception of warning signs sign colors shall be in contrasting colors as selected by Owners representative from manufacturers standard full color range
C Building Identification Signs Sign coloring as chosen by owner Sign shall be with 3Prime high letters Font as selected by Owners representative from manufacturers standard full range of available lettering Fonts
PART 3 - EXECUTION
301 PREPARATION
A Examine condition of locations and surfaces on which signs will be installed Do not proceed with installation until defects or errors which would result in poor installation have been corrected
11202017 10400 ndash Page 5 of 8 Signage
302 ERECTIONINSTALLATIONAPPLICATION ANDOR CONSTRUCTION
A Install signs at locations as indicated or required by ENGINEER Ensure that signs are installed plumb and true at mounting heights indicated and by method shown or specified Do not install signs on doors or other surfaces until finishes on such surfaces have been applied
B Anchorage Provide anchorage to ensure that signs are fastened securely in place Anchorage not otherwise specified or indicated to include slotted inserts expansion shields and power-driven fasteners when approved for concrete toggle bolts and through bolts for masonry machine and carriage bolts for steel through bolts lag bolts and screws for wood Provide slotted inserts of types required to engage with anchors
C Post Mounting Fasten sign to post with two corrosion-resistant U-bolts and nuts Set post minimum of 24 inches in-ground in concrete footing with a diameter sized to provide minimum of 4 inch cover over post crowned to shed water Top of sign to be 3 feet above finished grade
D Door Mounting Fasten to door with four corrosion-resistant metal screws Mounting height to be 60-inches above finished floor to centerline of sign
E Fence Mounting Fasten to fence with corrosion-resistant wire at each corner of sign Mounting height to be 48-inches above finished grade to centerline of sign
F Signage shall be installed at the locations detailed or as directed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations ADA ANSI A 1171 OSHA and approved shop drawings
G Posts for site signs shall be shop mounted on base plates and installed on 12-in by 12-in by 4-ft deep footings constructed of 2500 psi concrete and secured with nuts on anchor bolts cast into the concrete Peen-over bolt threads to prevent removal as directed Set concrete to provide bottom of base plate at 6-in below grade Dedication plaque shall be installed into holes drilled in masonry with waterproof cement in accordance with the approved shop drawings Plaque shall be flush with wall Locate on interior as directed
H Damaged units or components shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner
I Signage shall be cleaned to the satisfaction of the OWNER using the approved methods upon completion of the installation and again just prior to acceptance of the project
303 ADJUSTING
A Repair damage to signs incurred during installation Replace signs that cannot be repaired to new condition Clean glass frames and other sign surfaces adjust hardware as necessary
11202017 10400 ndash Page 6 of 8 Signage
304 PROTECTION
A Protect work and adjacent work and materials against damage during progress of work until completion Wrap finished work with paper polyethylene film or strippable waterproof tape for shipment and storage and protect from damage during installation
305 SCHEDULES
A In addition to Signs called for on PLANS and in this specification section provide the additional Signs listed In Attachment A
306 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section All costs are included in the Base Bid
11202017 10400 ndash Page 7 of 8 Signage
ATTACHMENT ldquoArdquo
Table 1 Building Signs Identification Material Sign Location
SUBSTATION NO 1 Aluminum Furnish and install four (4) Building Signs on the Electrical Substation No 1 Building exterior walls Coordinate with Owner for exact locations
Table 2 Warning Signs Identification Material Sign Location DANGER High Voltage ndash Authorized Personnel Only
Pressure Sensitive Vinyl
Doors 2 10 11 from exterior
Doors 19 20 on the side of the room into which the door swings into (eg on the control room side or the HVAC room side)
HVAC Equipment Room ndash Authorized Personnel Only
Pressure Sensitive Vinyl
Doors 3 4 from the exterior
Control Room ndash Authorized Personnel Only
Pressure Sensitive Vinyl
Doors 1 18 from the exterior
Table 3 Warning Signs Identification Material Sign Location MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE CLOSET DANGER High Voltage ndash Authorized Personnel Only
Pressure Sensitive Vinyl
Each exterior doors to Closet
Table 4 Warning Signs Identification Material Sign Location 1 The room contains energized battery systems
2 The room contains energized electrical circuits
3 The battery electrolyte solutions where present are corrosive liquids
Pressure Sensitive Vinyl
Doors 2 10 11from exterior
Doors 19 20 on the side of the room into which the door swings into (eg on the control room side or the HVAC room side)
11202017 10400 ndash Page 8 of 8 Signage
END OF SECTION
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 10441- Page 1 of 3 Fire Extinguishers MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
SECTION 10441
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
101 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section
102 SUMMARY
A Section includes portable hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers
103 SUBMITTALS
A Product Data For each type of product indicated Include rating and classification material descriptions
dimensions of individual components and profiles and finishes for fire extinguisher and mounting
brackets
B Warranty Sample of special warranty
C Operation and Maintenance Data For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals
104 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A NFPA Compliance Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10 Portable Fire
Extinguishers
B Fire Extinguishers Listed and labeled for type rating and classification by an independent testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction
105 WARRANTY
A Special Warranty Manufacturers standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire
extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period
1 Failures include but are not limited to the following
a Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10
b Faulty operation of valves or release levers
2 Warranty Period Six years from date of Substantial Completion
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 10441- Page 2 of 3 Fire Extinguishers MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
201 PORTABLE HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A Fire Extinguishers Type size and capacity for each mounting bracket indicated
1 Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following
a Amerex Corporation
b Ansul Incorporated Tyco International Ltd
c Badger Fire Protection
d J L Industries Inc a division of Activar Construction Products Group
e Kidde Residential and Commercial Division Subsidiary of Kidde plc
f Larsens Manufacturing Company
2 Valves Manufacturers standard
3 Handles and Levers Manufacturers standard
4 Instruction Labels Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10 Appendix B
B Purple-K Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container UL-rated 80-BC 10-lb (45-kg) nominal capacity with
potassium bicarbonate-based dry chemical in steel container
202 MOUNTING BRACKETS
A Mounting Brackets Manufacturers standard galvanized steel designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall
or structure of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated with plated or red
baked-enamel finish
1 Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following
a Amerex Corporation
b Ansul Incorporated Tyco International Ltd
c J L Industries Inc a division of Activar Construction Products Group
d Larsens Manufacturing Company
B Identification Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style size spacing and
location Locate as indicated by Architect
1 Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words FIRE EXTINGUISHER in red letter
decals applied to mounting surface
PART 3 - EXECUTION
301 EXAMINATION
A Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging
1 Remove and replace damaged defective or undercharged fire extinguishers
462018
SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 10441- Page 3 of 3 Fire Extinguishers MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416
B Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
302 INSTALLATION
A General Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction
1 Mounting Brackets 54 inches (1372 mm) above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Non-Standard 11132019
SAR WWTP Substation 1 13851 ndash Page 1 of 19 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
SECTION 13851
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
101 SUMMARY
A Scope of Work
1 A single Fire Alarm System Contractor (FASC) shall furnish all services and equipment as defined herein and in other Specification sections as listed below under Related Requirements The FASC shall have the qualifications as described in subsection 102 ldquoRelated Requirementsrdquo this Section of the Specifications
2 Furnishing a complete system design responsibility for the fire alarm system design for the Substation No 1 Building accompanied by a complete set of PLANS that shall be designed by a Texas State Fire Marshalrsquos Office Fire Alarm Planning Superintendent certified designer who is licensed in the State of Texas and all submitted PLANS must be stamped by the licensed designer in accordance to the requirements of the Texas State Fire Marshalrsquos Office The system design shall be in accordance with UL NFPA NEC ANSI and IEEE standards
3 Furnishing a complete system installation responsibility which shall include the furnishing of all labor materials and items of service required for the completion of a functional fire alarm system for the Substation No 1 Building as reviewed by the Owner in strict accordance with this section of the specifications and the applicable contract drawings At minimum all aspects of the fire alarm system installation shall be directly performed by or under the direct supervision of a State of Texas Fire Marshallrsquos Office Fire Alarm Technician certified technician that is licensed in the State of Texas
4 Furnish and install a complete and fully functional fire alarm system as shown on the PLANS and as Specified herein for the Substation No 1 Building The fire alarm system shall utilize a complete electrically supervised digital addressable multiplexed signal transmission intelligent type fire alarm control system
5 Fire alarm control panel remote annunciator panels monitor panels fire alarm pull stations smoke and heat detectors audible and visual notification appliances addressable interface devices device enclosuresback boxes coverplates interconnect conduitwiring mounting hardware and all related incidentals for a complete and fully functional fire alarm system shall be furnished and installed Boxes conduitwire shall be sized furnished and installed per the requirements of the PLANS and Division 16 Specifications unless specified otherwise herein
Non-Standard 11132019
SAR WWTP Substation 1 13851 ndash Page 2 of 19 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
6 All major elements of work are believed to be adequately described herein The FASC is expected to anticipate and include in the cost of the work any incidentals which may be required but not specifically expressed herein in order to provide a complete and fully functional fire alarm system for the Substation No 1 Building
7 The FASC shall provide a fire alarm system that meets all of the requirements stated herein The FASC is expected to make allowances for all necessary adjustments for the actual installation and to examine physical conditions which may affect the performance of their work and coordinate the actual pipe routing and equipment locations as necessary to accommodate the existing conditions obstructions and the work of other trades No extra payment will be allowed for FASCrsquos failure to make such allowances The cost associated with this task shall be included in the FASCrsquos base bid
8 The omission by the Engineer of any necessary system component as required by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction in the Drawings or Specifications shall not relieve the FASC of the responsibility for verifying and providing such necessity without additional cost to the Owner
9 The fire alarm system shall meet all current NFPA code requirements including but not limited to NFPA 13 13R 13D 14 and 72 and per the edition as required by the City of Austin The fire alarm system shall meet all requirements of the City of Austin Fire Department ADA guidelines all applicable Texas Accessibility Standards and currently adopted edition of the International Fire Code (IFC) as amended by the City of Austin
10 The FASC shall be responsible for coordinating with ATampT and the Owner for the installation of telephone services to the Substation No 1 Building The Owner shall furnish and install the telephone cables up to the Substation No 1 Building the FASC shall be responsible for routing the telephone cables within the Substation No 1 Building and for the termination of the telephone cables to the Fire Alarm Control Panel
B System Description
1 The fire alarm system shall monitor the smoke detectors and heat detectors for trouble and activation with audible and visual indication at the fire alarm control panel
2 The fire alarm system shall be an addressable digital supervised system
3 As part of the fire alarm control panel furnish and install a digital alarm communicator transmitter to seize telephone line(s) dial preselected telephone number(s) transmit fire alarm supervisory and trouble signals to a remotely located digital alarm communicator receiver central alarm station (operated by the Authority Having Jurisdiction) over a telephone line(s)
4 The fire alarm control panel shall include interface capability with the fire suppression systems
5 The fire alarm control panel shall provide signals as required to the security system to release all electrically locked exit doors on general alarm where applicable
Non-Standard 11132019
SAR WWTP Substation 1 13851 ndash Page 3 of 19 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
6 The fire alarm control panel shall provide interface capability to smoke dampers fans air conditioning equipment and other equipment as required for a fully functional and complete fire alarm system
7 Provide a total coverage smoke-detection system in accordance with the fire code and interconnect the total coverage smoke-detection system with all air-moving equipment as required per the Authority Having Jurisdiction to accomplish the required shutoff of air-moving equipment without the need of duct-mounted smoke detectors
102 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A Drawings and other Technical Specification Sections show andor specify additional features required to describe and illustrate functional requirements of the fire alarm system
B FASC Qualifications
1 The fire alarm system designinstallation entity shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience designing furnishing and installing complete fire alarm systems for buildingsfacilities that are similar in scope and value as required for this project
2 FASC shall have current firm alarm certificate of registration issued by the State of Texas Fire Marshalrsquos office and employ the licensed Fire Alarm Planning Superintendent and Fire Alarm Technician(s) who are performing the work on this project
C Manufacturer Qualifications A firm experienced in manufacturing systems similar to those required for this project and with a record of successful in-service performance
D Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components Obtain fire-alarm system components from a single manufacturer where possible
E Comply with the applicable requirements of Division 16 Specifications
F The Contract Documents are complementary what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all
G It is the CONTRACTORrsquos responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors suppliers and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of CONTRACTORrsquos Work
103 COORDINATION
A Coordinate as required with all necessary utility service providers such as telephone (ATampT) Authorities Having Jurisdiction such as the City of Austin Fire Department etc as required to establish the complete functional fire alarm system required for the project as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein
Non-Standard 11132019
SAR WWTP Substation 1 13851 ndash Page 4 of 19 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
B Coordinate layout and installation of fire alarm system subcomponents with other trades Coordination with the overall construction sequencing of facility is required to meet the raceway routing and device mounting requirements of the Drawings and Specifications
104 SUBMITTALS
A Submit shop drawings in accordance with the requirements of Section 01300 of the Contract Specifications Include
1 Riser diagram of fire alarm system initiating devices notification appliances and interface connections
2 Layout drawings showing locations of devices and appliances junction boxes wire and conduit routing auxiliary power supplies for visuals and connections to fire suppression system supervisory and ancillary devices
3 Dimensionedscaled top and bottom enclosure views front enclosure elevations and internal componentdevice layouts as applicable
4 Wiring diagrams as applicable
5 Catalog cut sheets Include all system sub-components annunciator panel as applicable
6 Calculations Include notification circuit voltage drop control panel battery-sizing and other calculations
7 Certifications Include the Alarm Planning Superintendent Alarm Installation Technician and Firm certificationsregistrations with the State of Texas Fire Marshallrsquos Office
B Field test reports Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements
C Submissions to Authorities Having Jurisdiction In addition to distribution requirements for Submittals previously specified make an identical submission to the City of Austin Fire Department Include copies of annotated contract Drawings as needed to depict component locations to facilitate review Resubmit as required to make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval Upon receipt of comments from the Authorities Having Jurisdiction submit to Engineer for review
D Certificate of Completion Comply with NFPA
105 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A Furnish Operation and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with the requirements of Section 01730 of the Contract Specifications Include
1 Installation and operation manuals
2 Renewal parts bulletin
3 As built drawings including approved shop drawings
4 Test data
Non-Standard 11132019
SAR WWTP Substation 1 13851 ndash Page 5 of 19 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
5 Record copy of site specific software on CD ROM complete with all necessary files
6 Software licenses registered in the name of the Owner
7 Software and Firmware Operational Documentation
a Software operating and upgrade manuals
b Device address list
c Printout of software application and graphic screens
106 CODE REQUIREMENTS AND PERMITS
A Code Requirements
1 All aspects of the electrical construction shall comply with all National Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA IEEE OSHA requirements local ordinances the Authorities Having Jurisdiction and all other pertinent codes and standards latest revision
107 SPECIAL SERVICES
A Provide service and maintenance of fire alarm equipment for two years from date of Substantial Completion
B Software Service Agreement
1 Comply with UL 864
2 Technical Support
a Provide software support for two years from the date of Substantial Completion
3 Upgrade Service
a Update software to latest version at Project completion Furnish install configure and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion Upgrading software shall include operating system Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software Provide 30 day advance written notice to the Owner to allow for scheduling and access to the system All upgrades shall also be provided to the Owner on CD-ROM and a full backup of the existing (prior to the upgrade) system software and settings shall be made on CD-ROM and provided to the Owner prior to upgrade
108 SPARE PARTS
A Furnish ten percent spare parts or a minimum quantity of three which ever is greater for the following
1 Audio visual signal units
2 Smoke and heat detectors
Non-Standard 11132019
SAR WWTP Substation 1 13851 ndash Page 6 of 19 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
3 Manual pull stations
4 Lamps for audiovisual signal units of each type
5 Detector bases of each type
6 Printer ribbonscartridges
7 Fuses of each type
8 Keys and tools (minimum one set)
B Furnish the above spare parts packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing the package contents
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
201 GENERAL
A All products shall be U L Certified at minimum
B Manufacturers
1 Grinnell Simplex
2 Silent Knight
3 Federal Signal Corporation
4 Fire Control Instruments Inc
5 Siemens Cerberus
6 General Electric
7 or approved equal
202 SYSTEM OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
A Furnish and install fire alarm signal initiation by the following
1 Manual stations
2 Heat detectors
3 Smoke detectors
4 Duct smoke detectors
5 Verified automatic operation of smoke detectors
6 Automatic suppression system flow as applicable
7 Fire-extinguishing system operation
8 Fire standpipe system
9 other alarm inputs as provided by the Fire Suppression Systems as applicable
Non-Standard 11132019
SAR WWTP Substation 1 13851 ndash Page 7 of 19 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
B Fire alarm signal shall initiate the following actions
1 Continuously operate alarm notification appliances
2 Identify alarm at fire alarm control panel and applicable remote annunciator panels
3 Initiate digital alarm communicator transmitter and transmit an alarm signal to the remotely located digital alarm communicator receiver central alarm station operated by the Authority Having Jurisdiction
4 Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths
5 Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders
6 Shutdown of fans and other air-handling equipment serving zone when alarm was initiated and as required per the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction and at no additional cost to the Owner
a Mechanical air-handling equipment including but not limited to mechanical ventilation equipment shall be supervised by the Fire Alarm System as required per the Authority Having Jurisdiction
b Coordinate all final requirements with the Authority Having Jurisdiction prior to and at the time of shop drawing reviewapproval by the Authority Having Jurisdiction
7 Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems serving zone where alarm was initiated
8 Record events in the system memory
9 Record events by the system printer
C Furnish and install fire alarm system supervisory signal initiation by the following
1 Valve supervisory switch
2 Low air pressure switch for dry pipe or pre-action sprinkler system
3 Other supervisory signals available from the fire suppression systems specified if any
4 Record events in the system memory
5 Record events by the system printer
6 Initiate the digital alarm communicator transmitter and transmit supervisory signals to a remote digital alarm communicator receiver central alarm station operated by the Authority Having Jurisdiction
D Furnish and install fire alarm system trouble signal initiation by the following
1 Open circuits shorts and grounds in designated circuits
2 Opening tampering with or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating devices
3 Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control panel
4 Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control panel internal circuits
Non-Standard 11132019
SAR WWTP Substation 1 13851 ndash Page 8 of 19 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
5 Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control panel
6 Failure in standby battery circuitry or battery charging
7 Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control panel or annunciator
8 Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or pre-action sprinkler system
9 Other trouble signals available from the fire suppression systems specified if any
10 Record events in the system memory
11 Record events by the system printer
12 Initiate the digital alarm communicator transmitter and transmit trouble signals to a remote digital alarm communicator receiver central alarm station operated by the Authority Having Jurisdiction
203 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL
A Construction Enclosed panel NEMA 12 rated at minimum suitable for wall surface mounting and the application environment in which the panel is located Also refer to the Drawings Provide multiple enclosures as required to contain the components as specified
B Power Supply
1 Primary Power Input 120 volts AC 60 Hertz single phase single point feed
2 Derive the necessary power for all fire alarm system sub-component loads from the single point feed inclusive of all needed power supplies voltage transformation and all necessary short circuit and overload protection for a fully functional system
3 Secondary Power Input 24 volts DC supply system with batteries automatic battery charger and automatic transfer switch complete with all accessories furnished and installed integral to the panel Batteries shall be sealed valve regulated recombinant lead acid type Batteries shall be sized to operate the complete system under the following operating scenario 24 hours with the complete system operating in normal or supervisory (non-alarm) operating mode followed by an additional 10 minutes with the complete system operating in alarm or supervisory mode (including all notification appliances)
4 Fire alarm system loads shall automatically transfer to the secondary power input upon loss of the primary power input
5 Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-supply module rating
C General Requirements
1 Field-programmable microprocessor-based modular power-limited design with electronic modules complying with UL 864
Non-Standard 11132019
SAR WWTP Substation 1 13851 ndash Page 9 of 19 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
2 System software and programs shall be stored in non-volatile programmable memory retaining the information through failure of primary and secondary power supplies
3 Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder and printer
4 The System shall provide a means to recall alarms and trouble conditions in chronological order for the purpose of recreating an event history Separate alarm supervisory and trouble logs shall be provided
5 Provisions for addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status with the following
a Smoke sensors shall additionally communicate sensitivity setting
b Temperature sensors shall additionally test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device
c Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment
d other devices as required
6 All wiring and terminal blocks shall be tagged
7 Provide overall three ply phenolic red-white-red nameplate with lettering not less than 1 inch high for control panel Secure to enclosure with stainless steel screws
D Indication and System Controls
1 Alpha-numeric Indication
a Arranged for interface between human operator at fire-alarm control panel and addressable system components including annunciation supervision and control Display alarm supervisory and component status messages and the programming and control menu
b Type Liquid-crystal type 80 character minimum
2 Keypad Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming display and control commands
3 Discrete Indicating Lights and System Controls
a At a minimum provide individual LEDs identifying alarm and trouble conditions within each zone and the type of device originating the signal
b At a minimum provide system reset alarm acknowledge alarm silence system test and lamp test pushbuttons These may be integrated into the keypad at the manufacturerrsquos discretion
E Serial Interfaces Minimum of two RS-232 or Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports to provide connections to printers laptop computers and miscellaneous peripheral devices USB ports are preferred if available
F InputOutput Signals Furnish and install the quantity and rating of inputoutput signals as required to interface with the Fire Suppression Systems Smoke Dampers door locks
Non-Standard 11132019
SAR WWTP Substation 1 13851 ndash Page 10 of 19 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
air conditioners fans and other equipment as specified elsewhere and as shown on the Drawings for a complete and functional system at no additional cost to the Owner
G Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter
1 Furnish and install a digital alarm communicator transmitter to automatically transmit alarm supervisory and trouble signals to a remote digital alarm communicator receiver central alarm station operated by the Authority Having Jurisdiction
2 Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote digital alarm communicator receiver central alarm station and shall comply with UL 632 Coordinate requirements with the Authority Having Jurisdiction
3 Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be mounted integral to the Fire Alarm Control Panel
4 Functional Performance Unit shall receive an alarm supervisory or trouble signal from fire-alarm control panel and automatically captures one or two telephone line(s) and dials a preset number for a remote digital alarm communicator receiver central alarm station(s) When contact is made with central station(s) signals shall be transmitted If service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds transmitter shall initiate a local trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote digital alarm communicator receiver central alarm station over the remaining line Transmitter shall automatically report telephone service restoration to the remote digital alarm communicator receiver central alarm station If service is lost on both telephone lines transmitter shall initiate the local trouble signal Transmitter shall be field programmable for use with one or two telephone lines
5 Self-Test Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to remote digital alarm communicator receiver central alarm station
6 Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall also provide
a LED display
b Field programmable selection of signals to be transmitted to the remote digital alarm communicator receiver central alarm station
c Programming device
H Printout of Events On receipt of signal print alarm supervisory and trouble events Identify zone device and function Include type of signal (alarm supervisory or trouble) and date and time of occurrence Differentiate alarm signals from all other printed indications Also print system reset event including same information for device location date and time Commands initiate the printing of a list of existing alarm supervisory and trouble conditions in the system and a historical log of events Printer shall be furnished and installed integral with the fire alarm control panel
I Instructions Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for displays and signals Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal alarm and trouble conditions
Non-Standard 11132019
SAR WWTP Substation 1 13851 ndash Page 11 of 19 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
J The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be manufactured by Tyco SimplexGrinnell and no equal
K The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall Comply with UL 864 Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems
L The following Fire Alarm Control Panel hardware shall be provided
1 Power Limited base panel with platinum cabinet and door 120 VAC input power
2 Minimum 2500 point capacity where (1) point equals (1) monitor (input) or (1) control (output)
3 Minimum 2000 points of annunciation where one (1) point of annunciation equals
a 1 LED driver output on a graphic driver or 1 switch input on a graphic switch input module
b 1 LED on panel or 1 switch on panel
4 9 Amp Power Supply minimum with temperature compensated dual-rate battery charger capable of charging up to 110 Ah batteries without a separate external battery charger Battery charger voltage and amperage values shall be accessible on the Fire Alarm Control Panel LCD display
5 Minimum One Auxiliary electronically resettable fused 2A 24VDC Output with programmable disconnect operation for 4-wire detector reset
6 Minimum One Auxiliary Relay SPDT 2A 32VDC programmable as a trouble relay either as normally energized or de-energized or as an auxiliary control
7 Minimum Three (3) Class B Addressable Notification Appliance Signaling Line Circuits (SLCs)
a Each Addressable Notification Appliance SLC shall be rated at 3A and capable of supporting up to 127 Notification Appliances per channel
b Wiring shall be 16 AWG to 12 AWG unshielded twisted pair wire Systems that require shielded wire for Notification Appliances shall not be accepted
c A constant voltage under both primary and secondary power conditions shall be maintained at the notification appliance field wiring terminal connections in the Fire Alarm Control Panel to ensure the voltage drop on the circuit is consistent under both primary and secondary power conditions
d For systems that do not provide a constant voltage source at the Fire Alarm Control Panel notification appliance field wiring terminal connections the fire alarm contractor shall
1) Provide separate point-to-point voltage drop calculations for all notification appliances under worst case secondary power specifications and
Non-Standard 11132019
SAR WWTP Substation 1 13851 ndash Page 12 of 19 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
2) Perform a complete functional test of all notification appliances under worst case secondary power conditions
8 Minimum Three (3) Class B Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC rated 3A24VDC resistive)
a NACrsquos shall be conventional reverse polarity operation and shall be for synchronized strobes and independent hornstrobe operation over two wires
b NACs shall be selectable as auxiliary power outputs derated to 2 A for continuous duty
c Strobe synchronization and audible cadence synchronization shall be across all panel NAC circuits Systems that cannot provide listed synchronization across all panel NACrsquos shall not be acceptable
9 Where required provide Intelligent Remote Battery Charger for charging up to 110Ah batteries
10 Expansion Power Supplies with minimum three (3) Class B integral Intelligent Addressable Notification Appliance Signaling Line Circuits (SLCs) for system expansion Expansion power supplys shall provide complete capability as the primary power supply
11 Power Supplies with integral conventional reverse polarity Notification Appliance Circuit Class B for system expansion Expansion power supplys shall provide complete capability as the primary power supply
12 Minimum Four (4) form C Auxiliary Relay Circuits (Form C contacts rated 10A 250VAC resistive) operation shall be programmable for other fire response functions Relays shall be capable of switching up to 10 A 250VAC inductive
13 The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall support up to (5) RS-232-C ports and one service port All (5) RS-232 Ports shall be capable of two-way communications
14 Remote Unit Interface supervised serial communication channel for control and monitoring of remotely located annunciators and IO panels
15 Municipal City Circuit Connection with Disconnect switch 24VDC Remote Station (reverse polarity) local energy shunt master box or a form C contact output
16 Programmable DACT for either Common Event Reporting or per Point Reporting
17 Fire Panel Internet Interface to provide supplemental notification and remote user access to the Fire Alarm Control Panel using Ethernet and TCPIP communications protocol compatible with IEEE Standard 8023
18 Modular Network Communications Card
M Cabinet Lockable steel enclosure Arrange unit so all operations required for testing or for normal care and maintenance of the system are performed from the front of the enclosure If more than a single unit is required to form a complete control unit provide exactly matching modular unit enclosures
Non-Standard 11132019
SAR WWTP Substation 1 13851 ndash Page 13 of 19 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
N Alphanumeric Display and System Controls Panel shall include an 80 character LCD display to indicate alarm supervisory and component status messages and shall include a keypad for use in entering and executing control commands
1 The system shall have the capability to provide expanded content multi-line operator interface displays as indicated on the drawings and specifications The expanded content multi-line displays shall be Quarter-VGA (QVGA) or larger and be capable of supporting a minimum of 854 standard ASCII characters to minimize or eliminate the levels of navigation required for access to information when responding to critical emergencies and abnormal system conditions The QVGA operator interface shall provide operator prompts and six context sensitive soft-keys for intuitive operation
a Expanded content multi-line operator interfaces shall be capable of providing the following functions
1) Dual language operation with Instant-Switch language selection during runtime
2) Activity display choices for
a) First 8 Events
b) First 5 Events and Most Recent Event (with first and most recent event time and date stamps)
c) First Event and Most Recent Event (with first and most recent event time and date stamps)
d) Scrollable List Display displays a scrollable list of active points for the event category (alarm priority 2 supervisory or trouble) selected The position in this list will be the last acknowledged point (not flashing) at the top followed by the next 7 unacknowledged points (flashing)
e) General Event Status (alarm priority 2 supervisory or trouble in system)
f) Site Plan
3) Equal or hierarchal priority assignment In systems with two or more operator interfaces each operator interface shall be programmable to allow multiple operator interfaces to have equal operation priority or to allow hierarchal priority control to be assigned to individual operator interfaces (locations)
4) Up to 50 custom point detail messages for providing additional point specific information in detailed point status screens
5) Bitmap file import for operator interface display of site plan and background watermark images
2 Expanded content multi-line displays shall have the capability to provide Dual-Language operation
a Language selection shall be via a switch on the operator interface panel Operator interface panels shall support instant-language-switchover
Non-Standard 11132019
SAR WWTP Substation 1 13851 ndash Page 14 of 19 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
during runtime to allow the operator to toggle between languages each time the language selection switch is operated without requiring complicated multi-step processes
b Both one-byte and two-byte characters shall be supported
O Distributed Module Operation File Alarm Control Panel shall be capable of allowing remote location of the following modules interface of such modules shall be through a Style 4 (Class B) supervised serial communications channel (SLC)
1 Addressable Signaling Line Circuits
2 Initiating Device Circuits
3 Notification Appliance Circuits
4 Auxiliary Control Circuits
5 Graphic Annunciator LEDSwitch Control Modules
a In systems with two or more Annunciators andor Command Centers each AnnunciatorCommand Center shall be programmable to allow multiple AnnunciatorsCommand Centers to have equal operation priority or to allow hierarchal priority control to be assigned to individual AnnunciatorCommand Center locations
6 Amplifiers voice and telephone control circuits
204 MANUAL PULL STATIONS
A General
1 Fabricated of metal or plastic and finished in red with molded raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color
2 The Manual Pull Station shall be surface mounted Furnish and install manufacturers surface back box Furnish and install coverplate
3 Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm pull-lever type
4 Integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal alarm or trouble) to fire-alarm control panel
205 SMOKE DETECTORS
A General
1 Operating voltage 24 volts DC
2 Base Mounting Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring
3 Integral Addressable Module Arranged to communicate detector status (normal alarm or trouble) to fire-alarm control panel
Non-Standard 11132019
SAR WWTP Substation 1 13851 ndash Page 15 of 19 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
4 Self-Restoring Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation
5 Integral Visual-Indicating Light LED type indicating detector has operated
6 Field adjustable Detector can be adjusted and tested after installation
B Photoelectric Smoke Detector
1 Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control panel and shall be able to identify the detectors location within the system and its sensitivity setting
2 LED or infrared light source suitable for use as a smoke detector and tested per UL 268A
C Ionization Smoke Detector
1 Shall respond to both visible and invisible combustion products
206 HEAT DETECTORS
A Heat Detector Combination Type
1 Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 degrees F or rate of rise that exceeds 15 degrees F per minute
2 Mounting Adapter plate for outlet box mounting
3 Integral Addressable Module Arranged to communicate detector status (normal alarm or trouble) to fire-alarm control panel
B Heat Detector Fixed Temperature Type
1 Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 degrees F or rate of rise that exceeds 15 degrees F per minute
2 Mounting Adapter plate for outlet box mounting
3 Integral Addressable Module Arranged to communicate detector status (normal alarm or trouble) to fire-alarm control panel
207 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A General Requirements for Notification Appliances
1 Individually addressed connected to a signaling line circuit equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections
2 Connected to notification appliance signal circuits zoned as indicated equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections
3 Combination Devices Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting assembly equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections
Non-Standard 11132019
SAR WWTP Substation 1 13851 ndash Page 16 of 19 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
4 Mounted on recessed outlet box Where surface mounted furnish and install manufacturers surface back box Furnish and install coverplate
B Horns Electric-vibrating-polarized type 24 volts DC with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille Comply with UL 464 Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 85 dBA measured 10 feet from the horn using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol
C Visible Notification Appliances Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971 with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate The word FIRE is engraved in minimum 1-inch high letters on the lens Provide rated light output in accordance with the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction
208 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL
A General Provide annunciator panel where required by the Drawings or by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction
B Description Annunciator functions shall match those of fire-alarm control panel for alarm supervisory and trouble indications Manual switching functions shall match those of fire-alarm control panel including acknowledging silencing resetting and testing
C Construction Enclosed panel NEMA 3R rated at minimum suitable for wall surface mounting and the application environment in which the panel is located Also refer to the Drawings
D Display Type and Functional Performance Alphanumeric display and LED indicating lights shall match those of fire-alarm control panel Provide controls to acknowledge silence reset and test functions for alarm supervisory and trouble signals
E Provide overall three ply phenolic red-white-red nameplate with lettering not less than 1 inch high for each annunciator panel Secure to enclosure with stainless steel screws
209 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE
A Description Microelectronic monitor module for use in providing a system address for alarm-initiating devices with normally open contacts
B Integral Relay Capable of providing a direct signal tofrom equipment as required by the Drawings and Specifications for a complete functional system
210 MISCELLANEOUS
A Wiring
1 Non-Power-Limited Circuits Furnish and install wiring per Section 16200 ldquoWiring (600 Volts and Below)rdquo Exception The following minimum wire sizes apply
Non-Standard 11132019
SAR WWTP Substation 1 13851 ndash Page 17 of 19 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
a Low voltage circuits No 16 AWG minimum
b Line-Voltage circuits No 12 AWG minimum
2 Power-Limited Circuits Furnish and install NFPA 70 Types FPL FPLR or FPLP as recommended by the manufacturer Minimum wire size is No 16 AWG
B Building Maps and Signage
1 Building map shall be provided adjacent to the Fire Alarm Control Panel and each annunciator panel Map shall consist of floor plans with all room numbers and zones identified Maps shall be properly oriented and mounted in a durable frame Handwritten or hand-drawn maps shall not be accepted
2 Provide additional signage as required by NFPA and Authorities Having Jurisdiction at no additional cost to the Owner
PART 3 - EXECUTION
301 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A Equipment Mounting Install fire-alarm control panel with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor
B Manual Pull Stations Mount in back boxes at 48 inches above finished floor
C Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing Comply with NFPA
D VisibleAudible Alarm-Indicating Devices Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and not more than 80 inches above the floor or least 6 inches below the ceiling whichever is lower
E Although it may not be shown on the Drawings size furnish and install conduitwire to interconnect the Fire Alarm Control Panel to the Building Telephone System
302 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A Furnish and install all wiring complete in a raceway system per all applicable requirements of the Division 16 specifications and the Contract Drawings with the following supplementary requirements
1 Color code all wiring differently from that used for normal building power wiring Use different wiring colors for alarm and supervisory wiring
2 Paint fire alarm system junctionpull boxes red
3 Ground fire-alarm control panel and associated circuits and comply with IEEE 1100
Non-Standard 11132019
SAR WWTP Substation 1 13851 ndash Page 18 of 19 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
303 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A Field tests shall be witnessed by the Owner and the Authorities Having Jurisdiction
B Manufacturers Field Service Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect test and adjust components assemblies and equipment installations including connections for all tests
C Perform the following tests and inspections
1 Pre-Test
a After installation align adjust calibrate and balance the system and perform complete pre-testing
b Test audible and visual appliances smoke detectors and heat detectors according to manufacturers written instructions
c Test for proper function of automatic transfer between primary and secondary power sources
d Test battery charging and battery backup system
e Test interlocks between the fire alarm system and
1) Fire suppression systems as applicable
2) elevators as applicable
3) door locks as applicable
4) supervisory valves
5) annunciator panels
6) and other equipment
f Test for functional compliance with the Contract Requirements Correct deficiencies observed replace malfunctioning components as required and perform all necessary adjustments re-testing until satisfactory performance is achieved
g Maintain a log of testing and associated test results for the Ownerrsquos review
2 Final Test
a Provide minimum of 14 days written notice to the Owner when the system is ready for final acceptance testing
b Test system per the requirements of NFPA and the Authority Having Jurisdiction
c Correct all deficiencies and completely re-test work affected
d Provide a typewritten report of test results signed by the Technician and witnesses
e Provide Certificate of Completion per NFPA
Non-Standard 11132019
SAR WWTP Substation 1 13851 ndash Page 19 of 19 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
3 After installation and final testing clean and vacuum all interior of the equipment Touch-up and restore damaged surfaces to factory finish
304 TRAINING
A Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Owners maintenance personnel to adjust operate and maintain the fire alarm system Include software related upgrades and maintenance
305 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section All costs are included in the Base Bid
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15061 ndash Page 1 of 10 Hangers and Supports for
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408 HVAC Piping and Equipment
SECTION 15061
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
101 SUMMARY
This Section includes the following hangers and supports for HVAC system piping and equipment
1 Steel pipe hangers and supports
2 Trapeze pipe hangers
3 Thermal-hanger shield inserts
4 Fastener systems
5 Equipment supports
102 DEFINITIONS
A MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc
B Terminology As defined in MSS SP-90 Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports
103 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A Design supports for multiple pipes including pipe stands capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems system contents and test water
B Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components
104 SUBMITTALS
A Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300 of the Contract Specifications
B Product Data For the following
1 Steel pipe hangers and supports
2 Thermal-hanger shield inserts
C Shop Drawings Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following
1 Trapeze pipe hangers Include Product Data for components
2 Pipe stands Include Product Data for components
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15061 ndash Page 2 of 10 Hangers and Supports for
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408 HVAC Piping and Equipment
3 Equipment supports
D Welding certificates
E Operation and Maintenance Data Furnish Operation and Maintenance Manuals as per contract documents Include certified and approved shop drawings Submit operation and maintenance manuals per the requirements of Section 01730 of the Contract Specifications
105 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Welding Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D11 Structural Welding Code--Steel
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
201 GENERAL MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
A Acceptable Materials for support systems specified in this sections
1 Materials of Construction of Hangers and Supports 304 304L 316 or 316L Stainless Steel
2 Provide components constructed of low carbon Stainless Steel (304L or 316L) for items that are to be welded
202 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A Description MSS SP-58 Types 1 through 58 Stainless Steel factory-fabricated components Refer to Part 3 Hanger and Support Applications Article for where to use specific hanger and support types
B Manufacturers
1 AAA Technology amp Specialties Co Inc
2 Bergen-Power Pipe Supports
3 B-Line Systems Inc a division of Cooper Industries
4 Carpenter amp Paterson Inc
5 Empire Industries Inc
6 ERICOMichigan Hanger Co
7 Globe Pipe Hanger Products Inc
8 Grinnell Corp
9 GS Metals Corp
10 National Pipe Hanger Corporation
11 PHD Manufacturing Inc
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15061 ndash Page 3 of 10 Hangers and Supports for
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408 HVAC Piping and Equipment
12 PHS Industries Inc
13 Piping Technology amp Products Inc
14 Tolco Inc
203 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
Description MSS SP-69 Type 59 shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods nuts saddles and U-bolts
204 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A Description 100-psig-minimum compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal shield
B Manufacturers
1 Carpenter amp Paterson Inc
2 ERICOMichigan Hanger Co
3 PHS Industries Inc
4 Pipe Shields Inc
5 Rilco Manufacturing Company Inc
6 Value Engineered Products Inc
C Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping Water-repellent treated ASTM C 533 Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552 Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier
D Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping Water-repellent treated ASTM C 533 Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552 Type II cellular glass
E For Trapeze or Clamped Systems Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe
F For Clevis or Band Hangers Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe
G Insert Length Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature
205 FASTENER SYSTEMS
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors Insert-wedge-type 316 stainless steel for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out tension and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used
1 Manufacturers
a B-Line Systems Inc a division of Cooper Industries
b Empire Industries Inc
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15061 ndash Page 4 of 10 Hangers and Supports for
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408 HVAC Piping and Equipment
c Hilti Inc
d ITW RamsetRed Head
e MKT Fastening LLC
f Powers Fasteners
206 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A Channels shall be fabricated with 316-Stainless Steel material All support channels shall be manufactured by ldquoUnistrut Corporationrdquo series P-1000ST and P-1001ST or approved equal
B All fastening hardware fittings supports threaded rods base posts clamps channel nuts framing system etc shall be fabricated with 316 stainless steel as manufactured by ldquoUnistrut Corporationrdquo or approved equal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
301 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
A Cut fit and place metal supports accurately in location alignment and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment
B Mechanical equipment piping and tubing support channels shall be fabricated with 316-Stainless Steel material
C Field Welding Obtain approval of Engineer for any equipment support structures that require Welding prior to proceeding Comply with AWS D11 Structural Welding Code--Steel
302 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment
B Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections
C Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing
D Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15061 ndash Page 5 of 10 Hangers and Supports for
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408 HVAC Piping and Equipment
E Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections install the following types
1 Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1) For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes NPS 12 to NPS 30
2 Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2) For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes NPS 4 to NPS 16 requiring up to 4 inches of insulation
3 Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3) For suspension of pipes NPS 34 to NPS 24 requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation
4 Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4) For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 12 to NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required
5 Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5) For suspension of pipes NPS 12 to NPS 4 to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection
6 Adjustable Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6) For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes NPS 34 to NPS 8
7 Adjustable Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7) For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes NPS 12 to NPS 8
8 Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9) For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes NPS 12 to NPS 8
9 Adjustable Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10) For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes NPS 12 to NPS 2
10 Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11) For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes NPS 38 to NPS 8
11 Extension Hinged or 2-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12) For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes NPS 38 to NPS 3
12 U-Bolts (MSS Type 24) For support of heavy pipes NPS 12 to NPS 30
13 Clips (MSS Type 26) For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction
14 Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36) For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36 with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange
15 Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37) For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36 with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe
16 Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38) For stanchion-type support for pipes NPS 2-12 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange
17 Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41) For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30 from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur
18 Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43) For suspension of pipes NPS 2-12 to NPS 20 from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15061 ndash Page 6 of 10 Hangers and Supports for
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408 HVAC Piping and Equipment
19 Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44) For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary
20 Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45) For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary
21 Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46) For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction
F Vertical-Piping Clamps Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections install the following types
1 Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8) For support of pipe risers NPS 34 to NPS 20
2 Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42) For support of pipe risers NPS 34 to NPS 20 if longer ends are required for riser clamps
G Hanger-Rod Attachments Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections install the following types
1 Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13) For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads
2 Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14) For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations
3 Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15) For use with MSS Type 11 split pipe rings
4 Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16) For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments
5 Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17) For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations
H Building Attachments Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections install the following types
1 Steel Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18) For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling
2 Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19) For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape
3 Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20) For attaching to bottom flange of beams channels or angles
4 Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21) For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams
5 Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22) For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large
6 C-Clamps (MSS Type 23) For structural shapes
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15061 ndash Page 7 of 10 Hangers and Supports for
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408 HVAC Piping and Equipment
7 Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25) For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange edge
8 Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27) For bottom of steel I-beams
9 Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28) For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads
10 Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29) For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads with link extensions
11 Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30) For attaching to structural steel
12 Welded-Steel Brackets For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by using clip and rod Use one of the following for indicated loads
a Light (MSS Type 31) 750 lb
b Medium (MSS Type 32) 1500 lb
c Heavy (MSS Type 33) 3000 lb
13 Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34) For sides of steel or wooden beams
14 Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57) For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required
15 Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58) For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited
I Saddles and Shields Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections install the following types
1 Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39) To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation
2 Protection Shields (MSS Type 40) Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation
3 Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts For supporting insulated pipe
J Spring Hangers and Supports Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections install the following types
1 Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47) Where indicated to control piping movement
2 Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48) For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-14 inches
3 Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49) For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs
4 Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50) To retard sway shock vibration or thermal expansion in piping systems
5 Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51) Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15061 ndash Page 8 of 10 Hangers and Supports for
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408 HVAC Piping and Equipment
6 Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52) Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support
7 Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53) Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support
8 Constant Supports For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support critical terminal or connected equipment Include auxiliary stops for erection hydrostatic test and load-adjustment capability These supports include the following types
a Horizontal (MSS Type 54) Mounted horizontally
b Vertical (MSS Type 55) Mounted vertically
c Trapeze (MSS Type 56) Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member
K Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections
L Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections
M Use mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction
303 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A Steel Pipe Hanger Installation Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89 Install hangers supports clamps and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure
B Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89 Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers
1 Pipes of Various Sizes Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers
C Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping
D Fastener System Installation
1 Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured Install fasteners according to manufacturers written instructions
E Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts bolts rods nuts washers and other accessories
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15061 ndash Page 9 of 10 Hangers and Supports for
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408 HVAC Piping and Equipment
F Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors and to facilitate action of expansion joints expansion loops expansion bends and similar units
G Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying
H Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel Install additional attachments at concentrated loads including valves flanges and strainers NPS 2-12 and larger and at changes in direction of piping Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts
I Load Distribution Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment
J Pipe Slopes Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B311 (for power piping) and ASME B319 (for building services piping) are not exceeded
K Insulated Piping Comply with the following
1 Attach clamps and spacers to piping
a Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature Clamp may project through insulation
b Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert
c Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B311 for power piping and ASME B319 for building services piping
2 Install MSS SP-58 Type 39 protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation
a Option Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers
3 Install MSS SP-58 Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees
a Option Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers
4 Shield Dimensions for Pipe Not less than the following
a NPS 14 to NPS 3-12 12 inches long and 0048 inch thick
b NPS 4 12 inches long and 006 inch thick
c NPS 5 and NPS 6 18 inches long and 006 inch thick
d NPS 8 to NPS 14 24 inches long and 0075 inch thick
e NPS 16 to NPS 24 24 inches long and 0105 inch thick
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15061 ndash Page 10 of 10 Hangers and Supports for
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408 HVAC Piping and Equipment
5 Pipes NPS 8 and Larger Include wood inserts
6 Insert Material Length at least as long as protective shield
7 Thermal-Hanger Shields Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation
304 ADJUSTING
A Hanger Adjustments Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe
B Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-12 inches
305 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section All costs are included in the Base Bid
END OF SECTION
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15083 ndash Page 1 of 17 Pipe Insulation
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
SECTION 15083
PIPE INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
101 SUMMARY
This Section includes pipe insulation materials insulating cements field-applied jackets accessories and attachments and sealing compounds
102 SUBMITTALS
A Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300 of the Contract Specifications
B Product Data Identify thermal conductivity thickness and jackets (both factory and field applied if any) for each type of product indicated
C Shop Drawings Show fabrication and installation details for the following
1 Insulation application at elbows fittings and specialties for each type of insulation
2 Removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections
3 Application of field-applied jackets
D Operation and Maintenance Data Furnish Operation and Maintenance Manuals as per contract documents Include certified and approved documents and shop drawings Submit operation and maintenance manuals per the requirements of Section 01730 of the Contract Specifications
103 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Installer Qualifications Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the US Department of Labor Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training
B Fire-Test-Response Characteristics As determined by testing materials identical to those specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency
1 Insulation Installed Indoors Flame-spread rating of 25 or less and smoke-developed rating of 50 or less
2 Insulation Installed Outdoors Flame-spread rating of 75 or less and smoke-developed rating of 150 or less
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15083 ndash Page 2 of 17 Pipe Insulation
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
104 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
Packaging Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM specification designation type and grade and maximum use temperature
105 COORDINATION
A Coordinate size and location of supports hangers
B Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for insulation application
C Coordinate adhesives and preparation of surfaces of exterior refrigerant piping with Coating Installer and ensure chemicals are properly selected
106 SCHEDULING
Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems Insulation application may begin on segments of piping that have satisfactory test results
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
201 GENERAL
A Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied
B Products shall not contain asbestos lead mercury or mercury compounds
C Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871
D Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795
E Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process
202 INSULATION MATERIALS
A Cellular Glass Inorganic incombustible foamed or cellulated glass with annealed rigid hermetically sealed cells Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in Factory-Applied Jackets Article
1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following or Engineer Approved Equal
a Cell-U-Foam Corporation Ultra-CUF
b Pittsburgh Corning Corporation Foamglas Super K
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15083 ndash Page 3 of 17 Pipe Insulation
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
2 Block Insulation ASTM C 552 Type I
3 Special-Shaped Insulation ASTM C 552 Type III
4 Board Insulation ASTM C 552 Type IV
5 Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ Comply with ASTM C 552 Type II Class 2
6 Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585
B Phenolic
1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following or Engineer Approved Equal
a Kingspan Corp Koolphen K
2 Preformed pipe insulation of rigid expanded closed-cell structure Comply with ASTM C 1126 Type III Grade 1
3 Block insulation of rigid expanded closed-cell structure Comply with ASTM C 1126 Type II Grade 1
4 Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585
5 Factory-Applied Jacket Requirements are specified in Factory-Applied Jackets Article
a Preformed Pipe Insulation ASJ
C Flexible Elastomeric Closed-cell sponge- or expanded-rubber materials Comply with ASTM C 534 Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials
1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following
a Aeroflex USA Inc Aerocel
b Armacell LLC AP Armaflex
c RBX Corporation Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180
2 Adhesive As recommended by insulation material manufacturer
3 Ultraviolet-Protective Coating As recommended by insulation manufacturer
D Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers Comply with ASTM C 450 for dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover elbows and tees
203 ADHESIVES
A Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials jackets and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15083 ndash Page 4 of 17 Pipe Insulation
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
B Cellular-Glass and Phenolic Adhesive Solvent-based resin adhesive with a service temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F
1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following as recommended by the insulation manufacturer
a Childers Products Division of ITW CP-96
b Foster Products Corporation H B Fuller Company 81-33
c Engineer Approved Equal
C Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive Comply with MIL-A-24179A Type II Class I
1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following as recommended by the insulation manufacturer
a Aeroflex USA Inc Aeroseal
b Armacell LCC 520 Adhesive
c Foster Products Corporation H B Fuller Company 85-75
d RBX Corporation Rubatex Contact Adhesive
D PVC Jacket Adhesive Compatible with PVC jacket
1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following and as recommended by jacket material manufacturer
a Dow Chemical Company (The) 739 Dow Silicone
b Johns-Manville Zeston Perma-Weld CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive
c PIC Plastics Inc Welding Adhesive
d Red Devil Inc Celulon Ultra Clear
e Speedline Corporation Speedline Vinyl Adhesive
204 MASTICS
A Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials jackets and substrates comply with MIL-C-19565C Type II
B Vapor-Barrier Mastic Water based suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services
1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following as recommended by the insulation manufacturer
a Childers Products Division of ITW CP-35
b Foster Products Corporation H B Fuller Company 30-90
c ITW TACC Division of Illinois Tool Works CB-50
d Marathon Industries Inc 590
e Mon-Eco Industries Inc 55-40
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15083 ndash Page 5 of 17 Pipe Insulation
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
f Vimasco Corporation 749
2 Water-Vapor Permeance ASTM E 96 Procedure B 0013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness
3 Service Temperature Range Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F
4 Solids Content ASTM D 1644 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight
5 Color White
C Breather Mastic Water based suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services
1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following as recommended by the insulation manufacturer
a Childers Products Division of ITW CP-10
b Foster Products Corporation H B Fuller Company 35-00
c ITW TACC Division of Illinois Tool Works CB-0515
d Marathon Industries Inc 550
e Mon-Eco Industries Inc 55-50
f Vimasco Corporation WC-1WC-5
2 Water-Vapor Permeance ASTM F 1249 3 perms at 00625-inch dry film thickness
3 Service Temperature Range Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F
4 Solids Content 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight
5 Color White
205 LAGGING ADHESIVES
A Description Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials jackets and substrates
1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following as recommended by the insulation manufacturer
a Childers Products Division of ITW CP-52
b Foster Products Corporation H B Fuller Company 81-42
c Marathon Industries Inc 130
d Mon-Eco Industries Inc 11-30
e Vimasco Corporation 136
2 Fire-resistant water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over duct equipment and pipe insulation
3 Service Temperature Range Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F
4 Color White
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15083 ndash Page 6 of 17 Pipe Insulation
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
206 SEALANTS
A Joint Sealants
1 Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass and Phenolic Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following as recommended by the insulation manufacturer
a Childers Products Division of ITW CP-76
b Foster Products Corporation H B Fuller Company 30-45
c Marathon Industries Inc 405
d Mon-Eco Industries Inc 44-05
e Pittsburgh Corning Corporation Pittseal 444
f Vimasco Corporation 750
B Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants
1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following
a Childers Products Division of ITW CP-76-8
b Foster Products Corporation H B Fuller Company 95-44
c Marathon Industries Inc 405
d Mon-Eco Industries Inc 44-05
e Vimasco Corporation 750
2 Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials jackets and substrates
3 Fire- and water-resistant flexible elastomeric sealant
4 Service Temperature Range Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F
5 Color Aluminum
C ASJ Flashing Sealants and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants
1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following or Engineer Approved Equal
a Childers Products Division of ITW CP-76
2 Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials jackets and substrates
3 Fire- and water-resistant flexible elastomeric sealant
4 Service Temperature Range Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F
5 Color White
207 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
ASJ White kraft-paper fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing complying with ASTM C 1136 Type I
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15083 ndash Page 7 of 17 Pipe Insulation
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
208 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921 Type I unless otherwise indicated
B PVC Jacket High-impact-resistant UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784 Class 16354-C 30 mils thick roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules
1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following
a Johns Manville Zeston
b PIC Plastics Inc FG Series
c Proto PVC Corporation LoSmoke
d Speedline Corporation SmokeSafe
2 Adhesive As recommended by jacket material manufacturer
3 Color White
4 Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available otherwise field fabricate
a Shapes 45- and 90-degree short- and long-radius elbows tees valves flanges unions reducers end caps soil-pipe hubs traps mechanical joints and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories
C Aluminum Jacket Aluminum roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming or factory cut and rolled to indicated sizes Comply with ASTM B 209 3003 alloy H-14 temper
1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following
a Childers Products Division of ITW Metal Jacketing Systems
b PABCO Metals Corporation Surefit
c RPR Products Inc Insul-Mate
2 Finish and Thickness Stucco-embossed finish 0016 inch thick
3 Moisture Barrier 1-mil- thick heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper
4 Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers
a Same material finish and thickness as jacket
b Preformed 2-piece or gore 45- and 90-degree short- and long-radius elbows
c Tee covers
d Flange and union covers
e End caps
f Beveled collars
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15083 ndash Page 8 of 17 Pipe Insulation
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
g Valve covers
h Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not available
209 SECUREMENTS
A Bands
1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following
a Childers Products Bands
b PABCO Metals Corporation Bands
c RPR Products Inc Bands
2 Stainless Steel ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240A 240M Type 316 0015 inch thick 34 inch wide with wing seal
B Staples Outward-clinching insulation staples nominal 34-inch- wide stainless steel or Monel
C Wire 0062-inch soft-annealed stainless steel
1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following
a C amp F Wire
b Childers Products
c PABCO Metals Corporation
d RPR Products Inc
PART 3 - EXECUTION
301 EXAMINATION
A Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application
B Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
302 PREPARATION
Surface Preparation Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15083 ndash Page 9 of 17 Pipe Insulation
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
303 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles
B Install insulation materials accessories and finishes with smooth straight and even surfaces free of voids throughout the length of equipment ducts and fittings and piping including fittings valves and specialties
C Install insulation materials forms vapor barriers or retarders jackets and thicknesses required for each pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules
D Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service Install accessories that do not corrode soften or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state
E Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs
F Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered
G Do not weld brackets clips or other attachment devices to piping fittings and specialties
H Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing
I Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer
J Install insulation with least number of joints practical
K Where vapor barrier is indicated seal joints seams and penetrations in insulation at hangers supports anchors and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic
1 Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments
2 For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic
3 Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer
4 Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation Install shields over jacket arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger support and shield
L Apply adhesives mastics and sealants at manufacturers recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15083 ndash Page 10 of 17 Pipe Insulation
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
M Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows
1 Draw jacket tight and smooth
2 Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips of same material as insulation jacket Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip spaced 4 inches oc
3 Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-12 inches Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches oc
a For below ambient services apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples
4 Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal
5 Where vapor barriers are indicated apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings
N Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness
O Insulation Installation on Fittings Valves Strainers Flanges and Unions
1 Install insulation over fittings valves strainers flanges unions and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated
2 Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive Fill joints seams voids and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth hard and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation
3 Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire Bond pieces with adhesive
4 Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material density and thickness as used for adjacent pipe Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation or one pipe diameter whichever is thicker For valves insulate up to and including the bonnets valve stuffing-box studs bolts and nuts Fill joints seams and irregular surfaces with insulating cement
5 Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material density and thickness as used for adjacent pipe Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation or one pipe diameter whichever is thicker Fill joints seams and irregular surfaces with insulating cement Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket Provide a removable reusable insulation cover For below ambient services provide a design that maintains vapor barrier
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15083 ndash Page 11 of 17 Pipe Insulation
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
6 Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation or one pipe diameter whichever is thicker
7 Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour
8 For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin install fitted PVC cover over elbows tees strainers valves flanges and unions Terminate ends with PVC end caps Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape
9 Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word UNION Match size and color of pipe labels
P Insulate instrument connections for thermometers pressure gages pressure temperature taps test connections flow meters sensors switches and transmitters on insulated pipes vessels and equipment Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement mastic and flashing sealant
Q Finish installation with systems at operating conditions Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement
R Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas Adhere staple and seal patches similar to butt joints
S For above ambient services do not install insulation to the following
1 Vibration-control devices
2 Testing agency labels and stamps
3 Nameplates and data plates
4 Manholes
5 Handholes
6 Cleanouts
304 PENETRATIONS
A Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated) Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions
B Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations
1 Pipe Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15083 ndash Page 12 of 17 Pipe Insulation
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
305 CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION
A Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes
1 Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials
2 Where vapor barriers are indicated seal longitudinal seams end joints and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant
3 For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches oc
4 For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient services do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant
B Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges
1 Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange
2 Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation
3 Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation
4 Install jacket material with manufacturers recommended adhesive overlap seams at least 1 inch and seal joints with flashing sealant
C Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows
1 Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available Secure according to manufacturers written instructions
2 When preformed sections of insulation are not available install mitered sections of cellular-glass insulation Secure insulation materials with bands
D Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties
1 Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body
2 Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation
3 Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application
306 PHENOLIC INSULATION INSTALLATION
A General Installation Requirements
1 Secure single-layer insulation with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch intervals and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15083 ndash Page 13 of 17 Pipe Insulation
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
2 Install 2-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches Secure inner layer with 0062-inch wire spaced at 12-inch intervals Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch intervals
B Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes
1 Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials
2 Where vapor barriers are indicated seal longitudinal seams end joints and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant
3 For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches oc
4 For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders on below ambient services do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant
C Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges
1 Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange
2 Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation
3 Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of block insulation of same material and thickness as pipe insulation
D Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows
1 Install preformed insulation sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation Secure according to manufacturers written instructions
E Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties
1 Install preformed insulation sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation Secure according to manufacturers written instructions
2 Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation
3 Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application
307 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION
A Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturers recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated
B Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges
1 Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange
2 Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15083 ndash Page 14 of 17 Pipe Insulation
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
3 Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation
4 Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturers recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated
C Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows
1 Install mitered sections of pipe insulation
2 Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturers recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated
D Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties
1 Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available
2 When preformed valve covers are not available install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation
3 Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application
4 Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturers recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated
308 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION
A Where PVC jackets are indicated install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints for horizontal applications install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels Seal with manufacturers recommended adhesive
1 Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge
B Where metal jackets are indicated install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches oc and at end joints
309 FINISHES
A Refer to schedule at the end of this Specification for piping systems that require finish
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15083 ndash Page 15 of 17 Pipe Insulation
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
B Pipe Insulation with ASJ Other Paintable Jacket Material Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in painting Sections
1 Flat Acrylic Finish Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof
a Finish Coat Material Interior flat latex-emulsion size
C Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation After adhesive has fully cured apply two coats of insulation manufacturers recommended protective coating
D Color
1 RenovationsAdditions to Existing Chilled and Hot Water Piping Match existing color
2 Other Piping Systems Final color as selected by Architect
E Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets
310 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
A Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section
B Items Not Insulated Unless otherwise indicated do not apply insulation to the following systems materials and equipment
1 Refrigerant interior and exterior liquid lines except at wall penetrations as noted in drawings
311 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements Remove defective Work and replace with new materials according to these Specifications
B Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings uncovered for inspection according to these Specifications
312 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE GENERAL
A Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials vapor retarders and field-applied jackets
B Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range If more than one material is listed for a piping system selection from materials listed is Contractors option
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15083 ndash Page 16 of 17 Pipe Insulation
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
C Items Not Insulated Unless otherwise indicated do not install insulation on the following
1 Drainage piping located in crawl spaces
2 Underground piping
3 Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury
D Where interior or exterior piping is insulated apply same scheduled insulation system within pipe sleeve
313 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A Service Condensate drain and Sanitary Waste piping
1 Operating Temperature 35 to 75 deg F
2 Insulation Material Flexible elastomeric
3 Insulation Thickness 34
4 Field-Applied Jacket PVC
5 Finish None
B Service Refrigerant discharge (hot-gas) piping
1 Operating Temperature 35 to 170 deg F
2 Insulation Material Flexible elastomeric
3 Insulation Thickness 1
4 Field-Applied Jacket None
5 Finish Manufacturers recommended protective coating
C Service Chilled Water Supply and Return
1 Operating Temperature 40 deg F and above
2 NPS 12 and Smaller Insulation shall be one of the following
a Cellular Glass 2 inches thick
b Phenolic 1-12 inches thick
3 Field-Applied Jacket PVC
4 Vapor-Barrier Mastic
5 Finish Custom color to match existing piping Provide two coats
D Service Heating Hot Water Supply and Return
1 Operating Temperature 200 deg F and below
2 NPS 12 and Smaller Insulation shall be one of the following
a Cellular Glass 2 inches thick
b Phenolic 1-12 inches thick
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15083 ndash Page 17 of 17 Pipe Insulation
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
3 Field-Applied Jacket PVC
4 Vapor-Barrier Breather mastic
5 Finish Custom color to match existing piping Provide two coats
314 OUTDOOR PIPING INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A This application schedule is for aboveground insulation outside the building
B Service Condensate drain piping
1 Operating Temperature 35 to 75 deg F
2 Insulation Material Flexible elastomeric
3 Insulation Thickness 1
4 Field-Applied Jacket Aluminum
5 Finish Manufacturers recommended protective coating
C Service Refrigerant liquid and discharge (hot-gas)
1 Operating Temperature 35 to 170 deg F
2 Insulation Material Flexible elastomeric
3 Insulation Thickness 1
4 Field-Applied Jacket Aluminum
5 Finish Manufacturers recommended protective coating
315 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section All costs are included in the Base Bid
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15183 ndash Page 1 of 5 Refrigerant Piping
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
SECTION 15183
REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
101 SUMMARY
A This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications
B Related Sections include the following
1 Division 16 Section for supports and installation requirements
102 SUBMITTALS
A Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300 of the Contract Specifications
B Product Data For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated Include pressure drop based on manufacturers test data and pressure-regulating valves
C Shop Drawings Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties including pipe tube and fitting sizes flow capacities valve arrangements and locations slopes of horizontal runs oil traps double risers wall penetrations and equipment connection details Show interface and spatial relationship between piping and equipment
1 Refrigerant piping drawings are schematic only Size piping and design the actual piping layout including oil traps double risers specialties and pipe and tube sizes to ensure proper operation and compliance with warranties of connected equipment
D Welding Certificates Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel
E Field Test Reports Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements
F Operation and Maintenance Data Furnish Operation and Maintenance Manuals as per contract documents Include certified and approved documents and shop drawings Submit operation and maintenance manuals per the requirements of Section 01730 of the Contract Specifications
103 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Welding Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section IX Welding and Brazing Qualifications
B ASHRAE Standard Comply with ASHRAE 15 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15183 ndash Page 2 of 5 Refrigerant Piping
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
C ASME Standard Comply with ASME B315 Refrigeration Piping
D UL Standard Provide products complying with UL 207 Refrigerant-Containing Components and Accessories Nonelectrical or UL 429 Electrically Operated Valves
104 COORDINATION
A Coordinate layout and installation of refrigerant piping and suspension system components with other construction
B Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for penetrations in exterior walls
C Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections
105 EXTRA MATERIALS
A Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents
1 Refrigeration Oil Test Kits Two each containing everything required to conduct one test
2 Refrigerant Four (4) containers each with 20 lb of refrigerant
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
201 MANUFACTURERS
A Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following or approved equal
1 Refrigerants
a Allied Signal IncFluorine Products Genetron Refrigerants
b DuPont Company Fluorochemicals Div
c Elf Atochem North America Inc Fluorocarbon Div
d ICI Americas IncICI KLEA Fluorochemicals Bus
2 Refrigerant Valves and Specialties
a Climate amp Industrial Controls Group Parker-Hannifin Corp Refrigeration amp Air Conditioning Division
b Danfoss Electronics Inc
c Emerson Electric Company Alco Controls Div
d Henry Valve Company
e Sporlan Valve Company
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15183 ndash Page 3 of 5 Refrigerant Piping
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
202 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A Hard Drawn Rigid Copper Tube ASTM B 280 Type ACR
B Wrought-Copper Fittings ASME B1622
C Wrought-Copper Unions ASME B1622
D Braze Filler Metal Copper-Phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A58 BCuP-5 (15 Silver 5 Phosphor and remaining Copper)
203 COPPER-ALLOY BALL VALVES
A Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures
B Two-Piece Copper-Alloy Ball Valves Suitable for R-407C and pressure rating of system Brass or bronze body with full or regular-port chrome-plated bronze ball PTFE or TFE seats and 600-psig minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem
204 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A Body Tin-bronze bellows with woven flexible tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced protective jacket
B End Connections Socket ends
C Offset Performance Capable of minimum 34-inch misalignment in minimum 7-inch-long assembly
D Working Pressure Rating Factory test at minimum 500 psig
E Maximum Operating Temperature 250 deg F
205 REFRIGERANTS
A ASHRAE 34 R-407C DifluoromethanePentafluoroethane1112-Tetrafluoroethane
PART 3 - EXECUTION
301 PIPING APPLICATIONS
Aboveground exterior and within Building Type ACR hard drawn-copper tubing
302 PIPING INSTALLATION
A Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15183 ndash Page 4 of 5 Refrigerant Piping
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
B Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section General HVAC Systems Materials and Methods
C Install piping as short and direct as possible with a minimum number of joints elbows and fittings Refer to drawings for general proposed piping route
D Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of compressor and other equipment Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection
E Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between pipes for insulation installation Use sleeves through walls sized to permit installation of full-thickness insulation
F Slope refrigerant piping as follows
1 Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from compressor
2 Liquid lines may be installed level
G When brazing remove valve stems seats and packing and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties Do not apply heat near expansion valve bulb
H Install flexible connectors where shown on PLANS
303 COPPER-ALLOY BALL VALVES
Install copper-alloy shut-off valve in refrigerant liquid line of each ACU refrigerant circuit Shut-off valves shall be located inside building as shown in drawings
304 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A Braze joints according to Division 15 Section General HVAC Systems Materials and Methods
B Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide) during brazing to prevent scale formation
305 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A Test and inspect refrigerant piping according to ASME B315 Chapter VI
1 Test refrigerant piping specialties and receivers Isolate compressor condenser evaporator and safety devices from test pressure
2 Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system at not less than the lower of the design pressure or the setting of pressure relief device protecting high and low side of system
a System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of test
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15183 ndash Page 5 of 5 Refrigerant Piping
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
b Test joints and fittings by brushing a small amount of soap and glycerine solution over joint
c Fill system with nitrogen to raise a test pressure of 150 psig or higher as required by authorities having jurisdiction
d Remake leaking joints using new materials and retest until satisfactory results are achieved
306 ADJUSTING
A Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat requirements
B Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating suction pressure
C Adjust set-point temperature of the conditioned air or chilled-water controllers to the system design temperature
D Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system according to manufacturers written instructions (Coordinate with ACU manufacturerrsquos checklist)
1 Check compressor oil level above center of sight glass
2 Open compressor suction and discharge valves
3 Check compressor-motor alignment and lubricate motors and bearings
307 CLEANING
Before installing copper tubing other than Type ACR clean tubing and fittings with trichloroethylene
308 SYSTEM CHARGING
A Charge system using the following procedures
1 Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to a vacuum of 500 micrometers If vacuum holds for 12 hours system is ready for charging
2 Break vacuum with refrigerant gas allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig
3 Charge system Provide full-operating charge
B If manufacturerrsquos recommended charging parameters differ from parameters stated herein the stricter parameter shall be implemented
309 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section All costs are included in the Base Bid
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15184 ndash Page 1 of 7 Copper Pipe and Accessories
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
SECTION 15184
COPPER PIPING AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
101 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section
102 SUBMITTALS
A Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300 of the Contract Specifications
B Product Data For the following products
1 Piping and fittings
2 Transition fittings
3 Strainer
C Field quality-control reports
D Operation and Maintenance Data Furnish Operation and Maintenance Manuals as per contract documents Include certified and approved documents and shop drawings Submit operation and maintenance manuals per the requirements of Section 01730 of the Contract Specifications
103 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Piping materials shall bear label stamp or other markings of specified testing agency
B Comply with NSF 61 for potable water piping and components
104 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A Interruption of Existing Water Service Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated
1 Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water service
2 Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Owners written permission
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15184 ndash Page 2 of 7 Copper Pipe and Accessories
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
105 COORDINATION
Coordinate routes of piping and installation with existing conditions other trades especially electrical and control trades
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
201 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A Hard Copper Tube ASTM B 88 Type K water tube drawn temper
1 Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings ASME B1618 pressure fittings
2 Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings ASME B1622 wrought-copper pressure fittings
3 Bronze Flanges ASME B1624 Class 150 raise faced with solder-joint ends NIBCO 771 or Engineer Approved equal
a Flange shall be joined as brazed not soldered Refer to Execution section of this section
4 Copper Unions MSS SP-123 cast-copper-alloy hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends
202 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials AWWA C110 rubber flat face 18 inch thick or ASME B1621 nonmetallic and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated
B Metal Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts ASME stainless steel unless otherwise indicated
C Brazing Filler Metals AWS A58A58M BCuP Series copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated
D Solvent Cements for Joining PVC Piping ASTM D 2564 Include primer according to ASTM F 656
203 VALVES
A Refer to PLANS for valve types and requirements
B Refer to Division 15 Section Valves for general valve requirements
204 STRAINER
Bronze body 125 PSI rated Y-Pattern strainer with threaded end connections stainless steel screen with 0020 inch round perforations and drain pipe plug
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15184 ndash Page 3 of 7 Copper Pipe and Accessories
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
205 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A General Requirements
1 Same size as pipes to be joined
2 Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined
3 End connections compatible with pipes to be joined
B Fitting-Type Transition Couplings Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting
C Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions
1 Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following
a Colonial Engineering Inc
b NIBCO INC
c Spears Manufacturing Company
2 Description PVC four-part union Include brass threaded end solvent-cement-joint or threaded plastic end rubber O-ring and union nut
206 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A General Requirements Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid pressure and temperature
B Dielectric Unions
1 Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following
a Capitol Manufacturing Company
b Hart Industries International Inc
c Watts Regulator Co a division of Watts Water Technologies Inc
2 Factory-fabricated union assembly for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F
C Dielectric-Flange Kits
1 Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following
a Advance Products amp Systems Inc
b Calpico Inc
c Central Plastics Company
d Drake Specialties
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15184 ndash Page 4 of 7 Copper Pipe and Accessories
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
e Pipeline Seal and Insulator Inc
2 Description
a Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges
b Pressure Rating 150 psig
c Gasket neoprene
d Bolt Sleeves polyethylene
e Washers phenolic with steel backing washers
PART 3 - EXECUTION
301 PIPING INSTALLATION
A Applications
1 Blower Cooling Water Piping Copper piping shall have brazed joint connections Provide flanges where shown on the PLANS and flange connections flanged valves and instrumentselements Provide threaded copper connection only at connections to threaded instruments
2 Tank Make-Up Water Piping Copper piping shall be have solder joint connections Provide threaded copper connections at valves accessories and instruments
3 Seal Water Piping Copper piping shall be have solder joint connections Provide threaded copper connections at valves accessories and instruments
B Drawing plans schematics and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss expansion and other design considerations Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings
C Provide soldiered cast copper reducing fittings to reduce from 3rdquo to 2-12rdquo or 2rdquo as required between proposed pipeinstrumentvalve flange and proposedexisting pipe Field verify existing pipe size for each blower system installation
D Install domestic piping level and plumb
E Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls
F Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance
G Install piping to permit valve servicing
H Install nipples unions special fittings and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated
I Install piping free of sags and bends
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15184 ndash Page 5 of 7 Copper Pipe and Accessories
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
J Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections
K Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment machine specialty and as indicated on PLANS
302 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs Bevel plain ends of steel pipe
B Remove scale slag dirt and debris from inside and outside of pipes tubes and fittings before assembly
C Threaded Joints Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1201 Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID Join pipe fittings and valves as follows
1 Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads
2 Damaged Threads Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged
D Brazed Joints Join copper tube and fittings according to CDAs Copper Tube Handbook Brazed Joints Chapter
E Flanged Joints Select appropriate asbestos-free nonmetallic gasket material in size type and thickness suitable for service Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B319
F Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints Clean and dry joining surfaces Join pipe and fittings according to the following
1 Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners primers and solvent cements Apply primer
2 CPVC Piping Join according to ASTM D 2846D 2846M Appendix
3 PVC Piping Join according to ASTM D 2855
G Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems
303 VALVE INSTALLATION
Refer to PLANS for locations Valves shall be full port and same size as line served
304 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION
Install dielectric fittings and flange kits in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15184 ndash Page 6 of 7 Copper Pipe and Accessories
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
305 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A Refer to PLANS for required hangers and support requirements
B For cooling water piping inside Blower enclosure use existing pipe support system for renovatednew piping systems
C Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturers written instructions
306 CONNECTIONS
A Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping fittings and specialties
B Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance
C Install flow elements sight flow indicators and other instruments as shown on PLANS and noted in other specification sections in piping systems Refer to Specification Section 17380 for description of additional instruments installed in piping system
307 FINISH
Refer to Section 09900 for painting and protective coating requirements Refer to PLANS for additional painting requirements of piping systems
308 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A Perform the following tests
1 Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered extended or repaired If testing is performed in segments submit a separate report for each test complete with diagram of portion of piping tested
2 Leave new altered extended or replaced piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested
3 Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained
4 Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required
309 CLEANING
Clean interior of piping system Remove dirt and debris as work progresses Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered extended or repaired before using Flush piping system with clean potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets
310 PIPING SCHEDULE
Refer to PLANS piping locations sizes and applications
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15184 ndash Page 7 of 7 Copper Pipe and Accessories
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
311 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section All costs are included in the Base Bid
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15500 ndash Page 1 of 13 General HVAC Systems Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408 Materials and Methods
SECTION 15500
GENERAL HVAC SYSTEMS MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
101 SUMMARY
A This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods to complement other Division 15 Sections associated with the HVAC systems as shown on the HVAC portion of the PLANS
1 Condensate and Overflow Drain piping materials and installation instructions
2 Dielectric fittings
3 Mechanical sleeve seals
4 Vibration isolation pads
5 Corrosion resistant pipe coating
6 Equipment nameplate requirements
7 Concrete Bases
8 Nonshrink grout for sleeve installations
9 Supports and Hangers
10 Installation requirements common to equipment specification sections
11 Cutting and patching
12 Touchup painting and finishing
102 DEFINITIONS
A Exposed Interior Installations Exposed to view indoors Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms
B Exposed Exterior Installations Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions Examples include rooftop locations
C Designation Abbreviated names of equipment as listed in equipment schedule on the PLANS
D Tagging Number Equipment tagging number as listed in mechanical equipment schedule on the PLANS
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15500 ndash Page 2 of 13 General HVAC Systems Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408 Materials and Methods
103 SUBMITTALS
A Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300 of the Contract Specifications
B Product Data For dielectric fittings mechanical sleeve seals vibration isolation pads pipe tube fittings and couplings and identification materials and devices
C Shop Drawings Mechanical fastening of condensing unit and scrubber unit Submit complete shop drawings and engineering data for review per the requirements of Section 01300 of the Contract Specifications
D Field Test Reports Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements
E Operation and Maintenance Data Furnish Operation and Maintenance Manuals as per contract documents Include certified and approved documents and shop drawings Submit operation and maintenance manuals per the requirements of Section 01730 of the Contract Specifications
104 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A Manufacturers Written Recommendations for Coatings Comply with manufacturers written recommendations for optimum temperature and humidity conditions for applying and curing high-temperature-resistant coatings Do not apply coatings until these conditions have been attained and stabilized
B Do not apply coatings in snow rain fog or mist when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent at temperatures less than 5 deg F above dew point or to damp or wet surfaces
1 Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and attain temperature and conditions specified before proceeding with coating operation
2 Coating application may continue during inclement weather only if surfaces to be coated are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during application and curing periods
105 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Comply with Uniform Mechanical Code and Uniform Plumbing Code and current City of Austin amendments thereof for all installations
B Comply with ASME A131 for lettering size length of color field colors and viewing angles of identification devices
C Comply with the requirements of NEMA OSHA NEC and all building codes Design construct assemble and test in accordance with AISC AISI ASTM NEMA IEEE UL and ANSI standards
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15500 ndash Page 3 of 13 General HVAC Systems Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408 Materials and Methods
D Equipment Selection Equipment of higher electrical characteristics physical dimensions capacities and ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing by Engineer and connecting mechanical and electrical services circuit breakers conduit motors bases and equipment spaces are increased Additional costs if any shall be approved in advance by appropriate Contract Modification for these increases If energy ratings or efficiencies of equipment are specified equipment must meet design and commissioning requirements of specified equipment
E Piping materials shall bear label stamp or other markings of specified testing agency
106 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A All materials and equipment shall be environmentally protected and stored in climate controlled (temperature and humidity etc) environment
B Interior and exterior of the equipment shall be kept clean at all times
C Do not store equipment in direct contact with the ground
D Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps Maintain end caps through shipping storage and handling to prevent pipe end damage and prevent entrance of dirt debris and moisture
E Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt Elevate above grade Do not exceed structural capacity of floor if stored inside
F Protect flanges fittings and piping specialties from moisture and dirt
G Coatings
1 Deliver coating materials to the Project site in the manufacturers original unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturers name and label and the following information
a Product name or title of material
b Product description (generic classification or binder type)
c Manufacturers stock number and date of manufacture
d Contents by volume for pigment and vehicle constituents
e Application instructions
f Color name and number
g VOC content
h Handling instructions and precautions
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15500 ndash Page 4 of 13 General HVAC Systems Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408 Materials and Methods
2 Store coating materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area protected from sunlight and weather at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F and a maximum ambient temperature of 110 deg F Maintain storage containers in a clean condition free of foreign materials and residue Follow coating manufacturersrsquo safety guidelines
a Keep storage area neat and orderly Remove oily rags and waste daily Take necessary measures to ensure workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling mixing and applying coatings
107 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other building components
B Arrange for pipe spaces slots and openings in building structure during progress of construction to allow for mechanical installations
C Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed
D Sequence coordinate and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning before closing in building
E Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services Comply with requirements of governing regulations franchised service companies and controlling agencies
F Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting if devices are applied to surfaces
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
201 PRIMARY AND OVERFLOW CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING
A Definitions
1 Primary Condensate Drain Piping Piping connected directly to main unit condensate pan and conveys condensate to designated drain via an indirect waste connection
2 Overflow Condensate Drain Piping Piping connected directly to overflow condensate pan and conveys condensate to designated drain via an indirect waste connection
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15500 ndash Page 5 of 13 General HVAC Systems Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408 Materials and Methods
B Materials
1 Exterior (outdoor) piping and piping in exterior wall penetrations
a Hard drawn rigid ASTM Type L Copper tubing with threaded wrought copper fittings
2 Interior (indoor) condensate piping
a General Schedule 40 PVC with threaded PVC fittings
b Operations Building Hard drawn rigid ASTM Type L Copper tubing with threaded wrought copper fittings
202 PIPE FITTING MANUFACTURERS
A Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following or approved equal
1 Dielectric Unions
a Capitol Manufacturing Co
b Central Plastics Co
c Eclipse Inc Rockford-Eclipse Div
d Epco Sales Inc
e Hart Industries International Inc
f Watts Industries Inc Water Products Div
g Zurn Industries Inc Wilkins Div
2 Dielectric Couplings
a Calpico Inc
b Lochinvar Corp
3 Dielectric Nipples
a Grinnell Corp Grinnell Supply Sales Co
b Perfection Corp
c Victaulic Co of America
203 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A General Assembly or fitting with insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion
B Description Combination of copper alloy and ferrous threaded solder plain and weld-neck end types and matching piping system materials
C Insulating Material Suitable for system fluid pressure and temperature
D Dielectric Unions Factory-fabricated union assembly for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15500 ndash Page 6 of 13 General HVAC Systems Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408 Materials and Methods
E Dielectric Couplings Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining threaded ends and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F
F Dielectric Nipples Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining plain threaded or grooved ends and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F
204 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A Sleeves The following materials are for wall floor slab and roof penetrations
1 ASTM A554-94 stainless-steel tubing ASME A11231 stainless-steel piping or engineer approved 316 Stainless Steel pipe or tubing
B Escutcheons Manufactured wall ceiling and floor plates deep-pattern type if required to conceal protruding fittings and sleeves
1 ID Closely fit around pipe tube and insulation of insulated piping
2 OD Completely cover opening
3 Cast Brass Split casting with concealed hinge and set screw
a Finish Polished chrome-plate
205 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A Manufacturers or approved equal
1 AmberBooth Company Inc
2 Isolation Technology Inc
3 Vibration Isolation Co Inc
B Neoprene Isolator Pads Oil- and water-resistant neoprene arranged in single or multiple layers molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized steel baseplates of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment Baseplates shall be located between neoprene and isolated equipment
206 CORROSION RESISTANT PIPE COATING
A Provide specified coating materials or approved equal by following manufacturers
1 Carboline Company (Carboline)
2 Devoe Coatings Company (Devoe)
3 DuPont Company (DuPont)
4 Glidden Co (The) (Glidden)
5 Benjamin Moore amp Co (Moore)
6 Porter International (Porter)
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15500 ndash Page 7 of 13 General HVAC Systems Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408 Materials and Methods
7 PPG Industries Inc (PPG)
8 Rust-Oleum Corporation (R-O)
9 Tnemec Company Inc (Tnemec)
B Provide Rust-Oleum 9100 System or approved equal white colored coating system as follows
1 Activator Rust-Oleum 9101 or approved equal activator
2 Base Rust-Oleum 9192 or approved equal white colored base
207 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS
A General Manufacturers standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division 15 Sections If more than one type is specified for application selection is Installers option but provide one selection for each product category
B Equipment Nameplates Metal nameplate with operational data engraved or stamped permanently fastened to equipment
1 Data Manufacturer product name model number serial number capacity operating and power characteristics labels of tested compliances and similar essential data
2 Location Accessible and visible location
C Snap-on Plastic Pipe Markers Manufacturers standard preprinted semirigid snap on color-coded complying with ASME A131 Pipe markers installed in exterior areas shall be coated and treated to help withstand direct sun exposure and help prevent fading of print
D Plastic Duct Markers Manufacturers standard color-coded laminated plastic Comply with the following color code
1 YellowGreen or Green Supply air
2 Blue Fresh Air
3 Nomenclature Include the following
a Supply or Fresh Air
b Direction of airflow
E Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs ASTM D 709 Type I cellulose paper-base phenolic-resin-laminate engraving stock Grade ES-2 black surface black phenolic core with white melamine subcore unless otherwise indicated
1 Fabricate in sizes required for message
2 Engraved with engravers standard letter style of sizes and with wording to match equipment identification
3 Punch for mechanical fastening
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15500 ndash Page 8 of 13 General HVAC Systems Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408 Materials and Methods
4 Thickness 18 inch unless otherwise indicated
5 Fasteners Self-tapping stainless-steel screws
F Lettering and Graphics Coordinate names abbreviations and other designations used in mechanical identification with corresponding designations indicated Use numbers (tagging-system) and wording indicated for proper identification and operationmaintenance of mechanical systems and equipment
208 CONCRETE BASES
A Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturers written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project
1 Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit
2 Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor Unless otherwise indicated install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base
3 Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor
4 Place and secure anchorage devices Use supported equipment manufacturers setting drawings templates diagrams instructions and directions furnished with items to be embedded
5 Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment
6 Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturers written instructions
7 Use 3000-psi 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section
209 GROUT
A Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grout ASTM C 1107 Grade B
1 Characteristics Post-hardening volume-adjusting dry hydraulic-cement grout nonstaining noncorrosive nongaseous and recommended for interior and exterior applications
2 Design Mix 5000-psig 28-day compressive strength
3 Packaging Premixed and factory packaged
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15500 ndash Page 9 of 13 General HVAC Systems Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408 Materials and Methods
PART 3 - EXECUTION
301 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A General Install piping as described below unless piping Sections specify otherwise Individual Division 15 piping Sections specify unique piping installation requirements
B General Locations and Arrangements Drawing plans schematics and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems
C Provide support structures for piping Refer to Division 16 for acceptable support materials and structures
D Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure
E Install piping free of sags and bends
F Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls Diagonal runs are prohibited unless otherwise indicated
G Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 1-inch clearance around insulation
H Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other spaced to permit valve servicing
I Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections
J Install couplings according to manufacturers written instructions
K Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls according to the following
1 Cast brass with concealed hinge spring clips and chrome-plated finish
L Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs as shown on the PLANS
1 Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces
2 Build sleeves into new walls and slabs as work progresses
a Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with nonshrink nonmetallic grout
3 Except for underground wall penetrations seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation using elastomeric joint sealants Use Type S Grade NS Class 25 Use O neutral-curing silicone sealant unless otherwise indicated
M Piping Joint Construction Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in individual piping specification Sections
1 Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs Bevel plain ends of steel pipe
2 Remove scale slag dirt and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15500 ndash Page 10 of 13 General HVAC Systems Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408 Materials and Methods
3 Soldered Joints Construct joints according to AWSs Soldering Manual Chapter The Soldering of Pipe and Tube or CDAs Copper Tube Handbook
4 Brazed Joints Construct joints according to AWSs Brazing Handbook Chapter Pipe and Tube
5 Threaded Joints Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1201 Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID Join pipe fittings and valves as follows
a Note internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends and proximity of internal seat or wall to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint
b Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified
c Align threads at point of assembly
d Tighten joint with wrench Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is being threaded
e Damaged Threads Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds
6 Welded Joints Construct joints according to AWS D1012 Recommended Practices and Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe using qualified processes and welding operators according to Quality Assurance Article
N Piping Connections Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated
1 Install unions in piping 2-inch NPS and smaller adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment with 2-inch NPS or smaller threaded pipe connection
2 Dry Piping Systems Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals
3 Wet Piping Systems Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals
302 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A Install equipment to provide maximum possible headroom if mounting heights are not indicated
B Install equipment according to approved submittal data Portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form Refer conflicts to Engineer
C Install equipment level and plumb parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces unless otherwise indicated
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15500 ndash Page 11 of 13 General HVAC Systems Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408 Materials and Methods
D Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service maintenance and repair or replacement of components Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting with minimum interference to other installations Extend grease fittings to accessible locations
E Install equipment giving right of way to piping installed at required slope
303 CORROSION RESISTANT PIPE COATING
A Provide pipe coating to all exterior refrigerant copper piping between condensing unit and air conditioning unit Provide three (3) coats of specified coating
B Provide pipe coating to all manufacturer installed condensing unit copper piping external to unit casing (if any) Take caution not to damage or prevent proper function of components within condensing unit Provide three (3) coats of specified coating
C Surface Preparation Clean and prepare surfaces to be coated according to the manufacturers written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified
D Material Preparation Mix and prepare materials according to coating manufacturers written instructions
1 Maintain containers used for mixing and applying coatings in a clean condition free of foreign materials and residue
2 Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density Stir as required during application Do not stir surface film into material If necessary remove surface film and strain coating material before using
3 Use only the type of thinners approved by manufacturer and only within recommended limits
E General Apply coatings by brush roller spray or other applicators according to the manufacturers written instructions Use applicators and techniques best suited for material being applied
1 Do not apply coatings over dirt rust scale grease moisture scuffed surfaces or conditions detrimental to forming a durable coating film
2 Allow sufficient drying time between successive coats to permit proper curing Do not recoat until coating has dried so it feels firm and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure and where applying another coat does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion
F Minimum Coating Thickness Apply each material no thinner than the manufacturers recommended spreading rate Provide total dry film thickness of entire system as recommended by the manufacturer
G Cleanup At the end of each workday remove rubbish empty cans rags and other discarded coating materials from the Project site
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15500 ndash Page 12 of 13 General HVAC Systems Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408 Materials and Methods
1 After completing coating application clean spattered surfaces Remove spattered coatings by washing scraping or other methods Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces
304 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A Piping Systems Install pipe markers on each system Include arrows showing normal direction of flow
1 Plastic markers with application systems
a Provide at least one marker on exterior and one marker on interior run of pipe
B Equipment Install engraved plastic-laminate sign on Air Conditioning Units (ACU) Air Handling Units (AHU) Scrubbers and Condensing Units (CU)
1 Lettering Size 12-inch- high lettering for designation of unit 38-inch-high lettering for unit tagging number
C Duct Systems Identify Scrubber Unit air supply and intake ducts with duct markers showing direction of flow Signs are not required for ACU or AHU ductwork
D Adjusting Relocate identifying devices as necessary for unobstructed view in finished construction
305 PAINTING AND FINISHING
Damage and Touchup Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish
306 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A Cut channel chase and drill floors walls partitions ceilings and other surfaces necessary for mechanical installations Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved
B Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces
307 GROUTING
A Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout
B Provide forms as required for placement of grout
C Avoid air entrapment during placing of grout
D Cure placed grout according to manufacturers written instructions
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15500 ndash Page 13 of 13 General HVAC Systems Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408 Materials and Methods
308 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section All costs are included in the Base Bid
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15780 ndash Page 1 of 11 Scrubbers
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
SECTION 15780
SCRUBBERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
101 SUMMARY
A This Section includes the Scrubber units as designated on the PLANS Each Scrubber unit is a factory-fabricated air-filter device with media used to remove gaseous and particulate matter from the air
B Furnish all labor materials equipment and incidentals required to provide and make ready for operation the Scrubber Units as specified herein
C Provide corrosion coupon testing services per the Instrument Society of America (ISA) Standard 7104 Services shall consist of six (6) site visits for over a period of two (2) years after the final completion of the project and associated coupons and test reports as specified herein
102 GENERAL SCRUBBER UNIT DESCRIPTION
A Each Scrubber Unit shall provide particulate pre-filtration two (2) stages of gaseous carbon media filtration and particulate final-filtration
B Each Positive Pressurization Unit (PPU) Scrubber Unit shall provide internal re-circulated and positive pressurization air flow rates as shown on the PLANS
103 RELATED CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A PLANS designate type number size and capacity of equipment included in the Scrubber Unit
B Comply with the Division-15 requirements of the Contract Specifications and HVAC PLANS
C Comply with the Division-16 requirements of the Contract Specifications and electrical PLANS
104 DEFINITIONS
A Exposed Interior Installations Exposed to view indoors Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms
B Exposed Exterior Installations Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions Examples include rooftop locations
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15780 ndash Page 2 of 11 Scrubbers
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
C Designation Abbreviated names of equipment as listed in equipment schedule shown on the PLANS
D Tagging Number Equipment tagging number as listed in mechanical equipment schedule on the PLANS
105 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS
A Submit complete shop drawings and engineering data for review per the requirements of Section 01300 of the Contract Specifications As a minimum shop drawings data shall also include the requirements of this Subsection of the Contract Specifications
B As minimum the Scrubber Unit Product Data shall also include
1 Fan type and drive
2 Fan curves
3 Rated flow capacity including initial and final pressure drop at rated airflow
4 Efficiency and test method
5 Motor information
6 Fire classification
7 Vibration isolation
8 Sound power levels
9 Filter information including weight initial resistance and recommended final resistance at air flows indicated on the PLANS for each filter and media
C As minimum the submittal drawings shall also include
1 Detailed equipment assemblies Include plan views elevation views sectional views and details to illustrate component assemblies and attachments including but not limited to supply and return grilles access doors pressure ports filters blower etc
2 For each field assembled component of the unit provide component dimensions component installed weight component operating weight component required clearances component method of field assembly
3 Detail differential pressure port mounting locations
4 Detailed point-to-point wiring diagrams for power process signal and instrumentation and control systems Wiring diagrams shall clearly differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed interface wiring
5 Bill of materials and catalog cut sheets on all materials
6 Final as-built drawings and information for all items and components installed each Scrubber Unit
D General
Items which are manufactured by others shall have the original manufacturerrsquos name complete catalog number and descriptive data as well as detailed product cut-sheets
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15780 ndash Page 3 of 11 Scrubbers
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
106 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A Submit operation and maintenance manuals per the requirements of Section 01730 of the Contract Specifications At minimum the manuals shall be inclusive of the requirements of this Subsection of the Contract Specifications
B As minimum the content of the Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall also include
1 Equipment function normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions
2 Assembly installation alignment adjustment and checking instructions
3 Operating instructions for start-up and testing routine and normal operation regulation and control shutdown and emergency conditions
4 Lubrication and maintenance instructions
5 Guide to ldquotroubleshootingrdquo
6 Parts list and predicted life of parts subject to wear
7 Outline cross section and assembly drawings engineering data and wiring diagrams
8 Test data and performance curves
9 Scrubber Unit Certified Production Test Reports and Installation information
10 Media sampling (coupon) results and reports Provide a section for entry of forthcoming media sampling reports and proposed media replacement frequency
11 Corrosion Coupon Testing Schedule
a The Contractor shall develop a media sampling schedule upon acceptance by the Owner (upon the final completion date of the project as shown on the Contract Documents) and submit to the Owner for review and comment
b The schedule shall include dates on which corrosion coupons are installed old coupons removed and dates by which results of corrosion test are submitted to Owner
c The Contractor shall adhere to the submitted scheduled dates of corrosion coupon placementsremovals and analysis submission dates
12 Approved and corrected copy of the shop drawing submittal data
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15780 ndash Page 4 of 11 Scrubbers
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
107 SCRUBBER UNIT WARRANTY
The manufacturer shall warrant that the equipment furnished will be fabricated in accordance with the requirements of this section of the Contract Specifications If within 24 months after acceptance by the Owner (after the final completion date of the project as shown on the Contract Documents) the equipment or any parts thereof are found defective because of material workmanship selection of materials or design the manufacturer shall at the manufacturerrsquos expense furnish and install replacement parts of a design workmanship and material approved by the Owner Any repairs or replacement parts furnished under the above stated warranty shall carry warranties of the same terms as set forth above from the date of its repair or replacement Cost of Travel lodging labor and parts required as a result of any Warranty Work shall be covered by the warranty (the Manufacturer) All warranty services shall be provided by direct-factory trained and direct-factory employed technician
108 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Product Options PLANS indicate size profiles and dimensional requirements of air filters and are based on the specific system indicated Other manufacturers systems with equal performance characteristics may be considered
B Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B
C ASHRAE Compliance Comply with provisions of ASHRAE 521 for method of testing and rating air-filter units
D Comply with Uniform Mechanical Code and current City of Austin amendments thereof for all installations
E Comply with the requirements of NEMA OSHA NEC and all building codes Design construct assemble and test in accordance with AISC AISI ASTM NEMA IEEE UL and ANSI standards
F Equipment Selection Equipment of higher electrical characteristics physical dimensions capacities and ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing by Engineer and connecting mechanical and electrical services circuit breakers conduitwiring motors instrumentation and control system and associated conduitwiring bases electrical and mechanical system protection level and equipment spaces are increased Additional costs if any shall be approved in advance by appropriate Contract Modification for these increases If energy ratings or efficiencies of equipment are specified equipment must meet design and commissioning requirements of specified equipment
109 DESIGN CRITERIA
A Furnish factory fabricated packaged air filtration unit complete with fans motors drives filter sections and access sections meeting the configuration shown on the PLANS andor as scheduled
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15780 ndash Page 5 of 11 Scrubbers
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
B Each fan and motor combination shall be capable of delivering 110 of air quantity scheduled at scheduled static pressure The motor furnished with the fan shall not operate into the motor service factor when operating under these conditions
110 SPECIAL MANUFACTURERrsquoS SERVICES
A Furnish the services of a qualified experienced direct-factory trained and direct-factory employed technician to provide on-site assistance in the installation of the equipment Include checking alignment of parts wiring connections operation of all parts (blower belt motor vibration isolation mixing damper return air damper filters filter racks etc) Include time to correct and recheck any discrepancies which are discovered Also include providing the Owner with copies of a report certifying that the equipment was installed properly tested and set in accordance with the Contract Specifications and is in satisfactory operating condition Reports format and quantity shall be per the requirements of Section 01300 and 01730 of the Contract Specifications
B Any problems encountered with the operation of equipment parts components etc installed within the Scrubber Unit shall be repairedremedied by the manufacturerrsquos technical representative
111 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A All materials and equipment shall be environmentally protected and stored in climate controlled (temperature and humidity etc) environment
B Interior and exterior of the equipment shall be kept clean at all times
C Do not store equipment in direct contact with the ground
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
201 GENERAL
A There shall be furnished as shown on the plans self-contained air purification machines as designated on the PLANS as manufactured by Purafil Inc Norcross Georgia USA or Engineer approved equal
B Provide quantities of Scrubber Units and configurationslocations of accessories and connections for each Scrubber Unit as shown on the PLANS
C Each Scrubber shall be installed with the direction of airflow as shown on the PLANS each with two (2) passes of adsorptive media The Scrubber shall be constructed with a contaminant control system consisting of four stages and include an integral blower
D The four stages within each unit shall be as scheduled on the PLANS
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15780 ndash Page 6 of 11 Scrubbers
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
202 VERTICAL PPU SCRUBBER
A Quantity and tagging as scheduled on PLANS
B The vertical P P U shall be arranged for vertical down-flow The return and outside air shall travel from the top of the unit to the bottom of the unit
C There shall be gasketed front access doors for servicing all components
D All stages shall be arranged to prevent air bypass
E There shall be grille covered openings in the top front of the unit arranged to accept return air from the ventilated space The return grilles shall be sized to provide an inlet air flow speed of no greater than 500 feet per minute when the unit is operating at the design specified total volumetric air flow conditions
1 Provide an aluminum opposed blade damper on the inside neck of each return air grille Damper shall be extruded aluminum with 1 maximum blade width positioned horizontally Where grille is 8 high damper shall have eight (8) blades
2 Provide Aluminum manual locking hand quadrant for each return air opposed blade damper Locate hand quadrant at the exterior of the unit as shown on the PLANS
F There shall be grille covered openings in the top front of the unit arranged to accept return air from the ventilated space The return grilles shall be sized to provide an inlet air flow speed of no greater than 500 feet per minute when the unit is operating at the design specified total volumetric air flow conditions
G The pressurization (outside) air shall enter the damper section through an opening located at the top of the unit Refer to the PLANS for the required size and location of the pressurization air opening The opening shall be centered along the depth of the unit Carefully coordinate location of opening with installer prior to fabrication
H The supply air shall discharge to the side of the unit near the bottom of the unit as shown on the PLANS Refer to PLANS for orientation size and location of the side discharge air opening
I MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION
1 The housing shall be constructed of 14 GA 316 Stainless Steel with continuous seam welded corners
2 The components of all air cleaning stages shall be supported and retained with extruded aluminum (6063-T5) track securely attached to the housing Isolate aluminum from steel to prevent galvanic corrosion All track shall contain an integral sealing material
3 The unit shall be provided with gasketed front access door(s) for servicing all components Latches shall have a positive locking action sufficient to secure the door compress the gasket and preclude air bypass around the air cleaning stages All hinges and draw latches shall be constructed of stainless steel
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15780 ndash Page 7 of 11 Scrubbers
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
4 A stainless steel nameplate shall be provided permanently attached to the unit Nameplate shall be engraved with the scrubber type order number and serial number
J BLOWER
1 The blower shall be a constant speed unit The unit shall not include an internal startercontrols All starters and controls shall be installed external to the unit and provided under separate specification section(s)
2 The unit shall NOT include a variable frequency drive Where a standard unit includes a variable frequency drive manufacturer shall remove the drive and wire the blower for standard on-site field wiring to external starter and control devices
3 The PPU Blower shall be located in the housing between the second and third stages of air cleaning
4 The blower shall have a backward curved airfoil Glass Reinforced Polymide wheel and be direct driven by a motor
5 The blower system shall provide 05rdquo IWG external static pressure at the design airflow
6 Blower motor shall be Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled (TEFC) high efficiency rated Class F Insulation with internal overload protection and with a 115 service factor
7 Blower motor power and electrical service shall be as scheduled on the PLANS
8 The blower shall be spring and neoprene isolated from housing for quiet operation
9 Refer to PLANS for blower schedule
203 UNIT VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A Manufacturers or approved equal
1 AmberBooth Company Inc
2 B-Line Systems Inc
3 Isolation Technology Inc
B Neoprene Isolator Pads Amber Booth SP-NR Type E or Engineer Approved Equal Oil- and water-resistant neoprene arranged in multiple layers molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized steel baseplates of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area and factory cut Each pad size shall be 6rdquo x 6rdquo minimum
C Refer to the PLANS for numberarrangement per equipment
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15780 ndash Page 8 of 11 Scrubbers
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
PART 3 - EXECUTION
301 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Furnish the services of a direct-factory trained and direct-factory employed technician to assist and supervise in the installation of the equipment connections and adjustments start-up and testing of the Scrubber Unit components contained therein Also refer to the requirements of ldquoSpecial Manufacturerrsquos Servicesldquo Subsection in this section of the Contract Specifications Include time to correct any defects or malfunctions
302 MANUFACTURERrsquoS CERTIFICATION
A The manufacturer shall provide a report certifying in writing that the equipment has been installed adjusted and tested in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations and are in proper working order
B Format and number of copies of Certification Reports shall be per the requirements of Section 01300 and 01730 of the Contract Specifications Also refer to ldquoSpecial Manufacturerrsquos Servicesldquo Subsection in this section of the Contract Specifications
303 EXAMINATION
A Examine area for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of units Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
B Verify that power supply is available and of the correct characteristics
304 INSTALLATION
A General
1 Install unit on neoprene pads Provide six (6) minimum pads each pad 6rdquox6rdquo Locate three (3) pads and in front portion of unit and three (3) at rear of unit Refer to the PLANS Verify pad size and loading with pad manufacturer and equipment weight
2 Install unit in accordance with the PLANS and in accordance with manufacturers written installation instructions
3 Install equipment according to approved submittal data Portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form Refer conflicts to Engineer
4 Install equipment level and plumb parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces unless otherwise indicated
5 Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service maintenance and repair or replacement of components Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting with minimum interference to other installations
B Electrical Wiring
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15780 ndash Page 9 of 11 Scrubbers
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
1 Refer to and comply with the electrical requirements of the PLANS and Division 16 Contract Specifications
2 Install and connect electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory mounted
C Fire Alarm System Connections
1 Coordinate with the Fire Alarm System installer and installconnect all cableselements with the Fire Alarm System for the properrequired monitoring and shutdown of equipment
2 Furnish copy of manufacturerrsquos connection diagram submittal to the Fire Alarm System installer as required for this Work
3 Refer to the Fire Alarm System specifications for additional requirements
305 REPLACEMENT ITEMS
A For each scheduled unit furnish the following extra replacement materials to Owner as described below that match products installed are packaged with protective covering for storage and are identified with labels describing contents
1 Three (3) sets of fan belts
2 Three (3) sets of replacement pre-filters
3 Three (3) sets of replacement media modules
4 Three (3) sets of replacement final-filters
306 CLEANING
After completing system installation and testing adjusting and balancing air-handling and air-distribution systems clean filter housings and install a new set of pre-filters and final-filters
307 PAINTING AND FINISHING
Damage and Touchup Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish
308 COMMISSIONING
A After installation check the following
1 Components are not damaged
2 Unit is level
3 Vibration isolation and flexible connections are installed correctly
4 Ductwork is connected
5 Bearings are lubricated
6 Filters are installed and clean
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15780 ndash Page 10 of 11 Scrubbers
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
7 Provide performance test and ensure unit performs as specified herein and as per manufacturerrsquos instructions
B Start unit according to manufacturers written instructions
C Complete manufacturers startup checks
309 TRAINING
A Provide 6 hours of training session for up to eight (8) ownerrsquos representatives at the job-site location andor at a location determined by the owner
B The training session shall be conducted by the same direct-factory trained and direct-factory employed technician who performed the field installation assistance and start-upsettingadjustment services
C At minimum the training session shall include
1 Operation and maintenance procedure for the equipment and all components contained within the Scrubber Unit
2 Means of proper storing handling replacinginstalling and disposing of filter media within unit
3 Procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown troubleshooting servicing and preventive maintenance
4 Coordination of analytical services to be performed by Scrubber Unit manufacturer
D Factory contact persons phone numbers persons names ordering procedures and procedures to follow to obtain meaningful results from the factory
310 ANALYTICAL SERVICES
A The following analytical services shall be provided for each of the scheduled Scrubber Units
B The Scrubber Manufacturer shall provide laboratory analysis services of coupon media per Instrument Society of America (ISA) Standard 7104 to comply with class G1 per ISA 7104 especially in regards to corrosion from Hydrogen Sulfide Analysis documents shall include corrosion rate (mils per year) method for determining ISA G1 requirements
C Provide one (1) media analysis check and analysis report at four (4) month intervals for two (2) years for each scheduled Scrubber Unit after acceptance by the Owner (after the final completion date of the project as shown on the Contract Documents) for a total of six (6) media checks per scheduled unit After placed each coupon shall have an exposure period of (60) days plus or minus 10 days
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15780 ndash Page 11 of 11 Scrubbers
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
D Each media coupon shall consist of a copper and silver strip At request of Owner Contractor shall provide all remaining coupons required for above testing in sealed and labeled wrappings at any point within the two year (2) period
E Contact Owner five (5) working days minimum prior to arriving at site to coordinate facility access for each scheduled visit Provide all required labor and expenses at no additional cost to the Owner for the placement retrieval and shipping of all coupons at the locations duration and intervals specified herein
F Provide the following number of coupons for each of the six (6) media analysis checks
1 One (1) media coupon in the discharge plenum of each scheduled Scrubber Unit
2 One (1) media coupon in the outside air duct of each scheduled PPU Scrubber Unit (not required for Recirculation Scrubber Units)
3 One (1) media coupon affixed in the room housing the Scrubber Unit(s) and located far from the scrubber system Locate coupon in an area away from human contact and at 60rdquo above finished floor Provide a sign with one-half inch lettering and located near coupon that states ldquoCORROSION COUPON IN PLACE PLEASE DO NO TOUCHrdquo
G Each Media Analysis Report shall include the following information
1 The exposure start date and removal date of each coupon
2 Proper regression per ISA Standard 7104 to equate to the 30 day exposure period for each coupon
3 Determine the corrosivity of the air supplied by the scrubber system and compare to class G1 ISA 7104 requirements
4 Determine the corrosivity of the air in the room and compare to class G1 ISA 7104 requirements
5 The exposure start date and removal date of each adsorptive media filter
6 Trend the corrosivity of coupons over time (per test) for each area
7 Expected date for replacement of media in each Scrubber Unit
H Submit each media check report manual per the requirements of Section 01730 of the Contract Specifications As minimum the manuals shall be inclusive of the requirements of this section of the Contract Specifications
I Coordinate with the Owner to log replacement dates of adsorptive media filters
311 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section All costs are included in the Base Bid
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15783 ndash Page 1 of 24 Control-Room Air-Conditioning Units
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
SECTION 15783
CONTROL-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
101 SUMMARY
A This Section includes air-conditioning units (intended specifically for control-room applications in a vertical air flow arrangement) equipment internalexternal accessories and mechanical connections (condensate drain pan and drain piping)
B Furnish all labor materials equipment and incidentals required to provide and make ready for operation the split system air cooled controlcomputer-room grade Air Conditioning Units and associated Condensing Units as specified herein and as scheduled on the PLANS
C The Air Conditioning Unit and Condensing Units shall be used as the means to provide temperature and humidity control
102 RELATED CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A PLANS designate type number size and capacity of equipment included in the Air Conditioning Units and Condensing Units
B Comply with the Division-15 requirements of the Contract Specifications and HVAC PLANS
C Comply with the Division-16 requirements of the Contract Specifications and electrical PLANS
D Comply with the requirements of Division 17 of the Contract Specifications and instrumentation PLANS
103 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS
A Submit complete shop drawings and engineering data for review per the requirements of Section 01300 of the Contract Specifications As a minimum shop drawings data shall also include the requirements of this section of the Contract Specifications
B As minimum the Product Data shall also include
1 Equipment Product Data Include rated capacities materials of construction fan curves fan type and drive motor information internal vibration isolation coil performance data sound power levels filter information furnished specialties and accessories
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15783 ndash Page 2 of 24 Control-Room Air-Conditioning Units
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
C As minimum the Drawings shall also include
1 Equipment Shop Drawings
a Detailed equipment assemblies Include plan views elevation views sectional views and details to illustrate component assemblies and attachments
b For each field assembled component of the unit provide component dimensions component installed weight component operating weight component required clearances component method of field assembly
c Refrigerant Product Data For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated Include pressure drop based on manufacturers test data solenoid valves and pressure-regulating valves
d Setting adjustments templates and other requirements for installing anchor bolts and anchorages
e Detailed point-to-point wiring diagrams for power process signal and instrumentation and control systems Wiring diagrams shall clearly differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed interface wiring
2 Bill of materials and catalog cut sheets on all materials
3 Final as-built drawings and information for all items and components installed in the Air Conditioning Unit and Condensing Unit
D Welding Certificates Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel
E Field Test Reports Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements
F General Items which are manufactured by others shall have the original manufacturerrsquos name complete catalog number and descriptive data as well as detailed product cut-sheets
104 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A Submit operation and maintenance manuals per the requirements of Section 01730 of the Contract Specifications As minimum the manuals shall be inclusive of the requirements of this section of the Contract Specifications
B As minimum the content of the Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall also include
1 Equipment function normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions
2 Assembly installation alignment adjustment and checking instructions
3 Operating instructions for start-up routine and normal operation regulation and control shutdown and emergency conditions
4 Lubrication and maintenance instructions
5 Guide to ldquotroubleshootingrdquo
6 Parts list and predicted life of parts subject to wear
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15783 ndash Page 3 of 24 Control-Room Air-Conditioning Units
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
7 Outline cross section and assembly drawings engineering data and wiring diagrams
8 Test data and performance curves where applicable
9 Hard copy and electronic copy of the approved shop drawings (final versions) and final as-built drawings Include final versions of the electronic files required in ldquoSpecial Submittal Requirementsldquo Subsection above on CD-ROM
10 Air Conditioning Unit and Condensing Unit Certified Production Test Reports and Installation information
11 Approved and corrected copy of the shop drawing submittal data
105 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Listing and Labeling Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section that are listed and labeled
1 The Terms Listed and Labeled As defined in the National Electrical Code Article 100
2 Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications A Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory as defined in OSHA Regulation 19107
B Comply with NFPA 70
C Comply with City of Austin Energy Code
D Welding Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section IX Welding and Brazing Qualifications
E ASME Standard Comply with ASME B315 Refrigeration Piping
F The unit shall be a self-contained factory-assembled unit and CSA-certified to the harmonized US and Canadian product safety standard CSA C222 No 236UL 1995 for Heating and Cooling Equipment and shall be marked with the CSA c-us logo
G The system shall be AHRI Certified using AHRI Standard 1360
H UL Standard Provide products complying with UL 207 Refrigerant-Containing Components and Accessories Non-electrical or UL 429 Electrically Operated Valves
106 COORDINATION
A Coordinate layout and installation of units and suspension components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them including ductwork light fixtures electrical power distribution conduits and control wiring conduits
B Coordinate size and location of supports hangers
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15783 ndash Page 4 of 24 Control-Room Air-Conditioning Units
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
107 WARRANTY
A The manufacturer shall warrant that the equipment furnished will be fabricated in accordance with the requirements of this section of the Contract Specifications If within 24 months after acceptance by the Owner (after the final completion date of the project as shown on the Contract Documents) the equipment or any parts thereof are found defective because of material workmanship selection of materials or design the manufacturer shall at the manufacturerrsquos expense furnish and install replacement parts of a design workmanship and material approved by the Owner
B Special Warranty for the Belts Shaft Blower Bearings Sheave and Pulley If within 60 months [five (5) consecutive years] after acceptance by the Owner (after the final completion date of the project as shown on the Contract Documents) the belts shaft blower bearings sheave and pulley or any parts thereof are found defective because of material workmanship selection of materials or design the manufacturer shall at the manufacturerrsquos expense furnish and install replacement parts of a design workmanship and material approved by the Owner
C Special Warranty for the Compressors If within 120 months [ten (10) consecutive years] after acceptance by the Owner (after the final completion date of the project as shown on the Contract Documents) the compressors or any parts thereof are found defective because of material workmanship selection of materials or design the manufacturer shall at the manufacturerrsquos expense furnish and install replacement parts of a design workmanship and material approved by the Owner
D Any repairs or replacement parts furnished under the above stated warranties shall carry warranties of the same terms as set forth above from the date of its repair or replacement Cost of Travel lodging labor and parts required as a result of any Warranty Work shall be covered by the warranty (the Manufacturer) All warranty services shall be provided by direct-factory trained and direct-factory employed technicians Third party service providers other than direct-factory employed technicians shall not be allowed
108 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A All materials and equipment shall be environmentally protected and stored in climate controlled (temperature and humidity etc) environment
B Interior and exterior of the equipment shall be kept clean at all times
C Do not store equipment in direct contact with the ground
109 SPECIAL MANUFACTURERrsquoS SERVICES
A Furnish the services of a qualified experienced direct-factory trained and direct-factory employed technician to provide on-site assistance in the installation of the equipment Include checking alignment of parts wiring connections operation of all parts (blowers belts motors compressors direction expansion coils refrigeration circuits refrigeration system accessories evaporator pan vibration isolation filters filter racks relays starters pressure sensors control panels water detection sensors internal condensate piping external condensate piping etc) Include time to correct and recheck any
Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15783 ndash Page 5 of 24 Control-Room Air-Conditioning Units
Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408
discrepancies which are discovered Also include providing the Owner with copies of a report certifying that the equipment was installed properly tested and set in accordance with the Contract Specifications and is in satisfactory operating condition Reports format and quantity shall be per the requirements of Section 01300 and 01730 of the Contract Specifications
B Any problems encountered with the operation of equipment parts components etc installed within the new Air Conditioning Unit and Condensing Unit shall be repairedremedied by the direct-factory trained and direct-factory employed technician
110 EXTRA MATERIALS
A Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed are packaged with protective covering for storage and are identified with labels describing contents
1 Fan Belts Four (4) sets for belt-drive fan
2 Filters Three (3) sets of return air filters for unit
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
201 MANUFACTURERS
A Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following or approved equal
B Modular Units
1 Liebert Corp
2 Airflow Co Marduk Holding Corp
3 Engineer Approved Equal
202 MODULAR UNITS
A Description and Assembly Packaged factory assembled prewired and prepiped consisting of cabinet fans filters and controls
1 Assembly Upflow air delivery in draw-through configuration The supply air shall exit from the top of the unit The return air shall enter the unit from the front of the cabinet through factory-installed grilles
B Cabinet and Frame Welded steel suitably braced for rigidity supporting compressors and other mechanical equipment and fittings
1 The frame shall be MIG welded formed sheet metal It shall be protected against corrosion using the autophoretic coating process The frame shall be capable of being separated into three parts in the field to accommodate rigging through small spaces